600383035B
A REGIONAL-SCALE  (1000 KM) MODEL OF PHOTOCHEMICAL AIR POLLUTION
            Part 2.  Input Processor  Network Design
                        Robert G. Lamb
             Meteorology and Assessment Division
           Environmental Sciences Research Laboratory
         Research Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711
          ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES RESEARCH LABORATORY
              OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
             U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
               RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NC 27711

-------
A REGIONAL-SCALE (1000 KM)  MODEL  OF  PHOTOCHEMICAL AIR  POLLUTION
            Part 2.   Input  Processor Network Design
                         Robert  G.  Lamb
              Meteorology and  Assessment  Division
           Environmental  Sciences Research  Laboratory
         Research Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711
          ENVIRONMENTAL  SCIENCES  RESEARCH  LABORATORY
              OFFICE  OF  RESEARCH  AND DEVELOPMENT
             U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
               RESEARCH  TRIANGLE  PARK,  NC  27711

-------
                              NOTICE

This  document   has  been   reviewed   in  accordance   with  U.S.
Environmental   Protection   Agency   policy   and   approved   for
publication.   Mention  of trade names or  commercial  products does
not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                                    PREFACE
                                  i
     After  the model described  in Part  1 of this  report was  formulated,  a
draft of  an  instruction  manual  was rather hastily prepared  to guide computer
Drogrammers in the  task  of transforming the theory into an operational model.
The  present  report, Part  2,  evolved from  that  manual.   The  purpose  of this
document  goes  beyond  that of  an instruction manual,  however.   The  broader
                                                   c\.
abjective is to  provide  in conjunction with Part 1 -of detailed description of
 --hat we regard as EPA's first-generation regional oxidant model.

     In attempting  to  use  science as a tool  for  treating the types of applied
problems  that  are of  concern  to  the  EPA, one  is  not allowed  the  luxury of
simplifying  assumptions  that reduce problems to  forms that  possess  concise
elegant solutions.  Instead, one must face the harsh realities of the physical
world and search  for approximate descriptions  of  phenomena that  strike an
acceptable compromise  between scientific rigor and practicability.  Just what
constitutes an "acceptable" compromise  in this case is a subjective judgement
that each person must make for himself.   In my view,  several of the techniques
presented in this report represent compromises that are not wholly acceptable,
but they must suffice for now because time constraints dictate that we move on
to the task  of model testing.   Hopefully, the flexibility that we have built
into the  basic  framework of the model will foster efforts by others to expand
and  improve  upon the  work we have  done; and a  second generation model  will
emerge significantly better than the model presented here.

                                                  R.G.  Lamb
                                                  November 1983
                                      m

-------
                          ABSTRACT
     Detailed specifications are given for a network of data
processors and submodels that can generate the parameter fields
required by the regional oxidant model formulated in Part 1 of
this report.  Operations performed by the processor network in-
clude simulation of the motion and depth of the nighttime rad-
iation inversion layer; simulation of the depth of the convec-
tive mixed and cloud layers; estimation of the synoptic-scale
vertical motion fields; generation of ensembles of layer-aver--
aged horizontal winds; calculation of vertical turbulence fluxes,
pollutant deposition velocities, parameters for a subgrid-scale
concentration fluctuation parameterization scheme; and many
other functions.  This network of processors and submodels, in
combination with the core model developed in Part 1, represent
the EPA's first-generation regional oxidant model.

-------
                                 CONTENTS
Deface  	   i i i
•stract	    iy
gures  	  vi i i
Dies  	    xi
iknowledgements  	  xiii

    1.   Introduction  	     1
          General Discussion  	     1
          Summary of  Processor  Functions  	     5
            Processor PI  	     5
            Processor P2  	     5
            Processor P3  	     7
            Processor P4	     7
            Processor P7  	     7
            Processor P8  	     7
            Processor P9  	     7
            Processor P10 	     8
            Processor Pll	     8
            Processor P12 	     8
            Processor P15 	     8
            BMC	     8
          Summary of  Model  Equations  	     9
            Layer 1	     9
            Layer 2	    12
            Layer 3 	    14
            Layer 0 	    15

    2.   Processor PI	    18
          General Discussion  	    18
            Step 1	    18
            Step 2	    19
            Step 3 	    20
            Step 4	    20
            Step 5	:	    21
            Step 6	    21
            Step 7	    22
            Step 8	    23
            Step 9	    23
            Step 10 	    24
            Stage INT	    24

    3.   Processor P2  	    30
          General Discussion  	    30
            Stage LBC:  Estimating "lateral boundary conditions
                       from  monitoring data 	    34

-------
                        CONTENTS (continued)


        Stage 1C:    Estimating initial  conditions from
                    monitoring data	—	    34
        Stage UBC:   Upper boundary conditions 	    36

4.  Processor P3 	    39
      Genera] Discussion 	    39
        Step 1	    39
        Step 2 	    40
        Step 3 	    41
        Step 4	    42
        Stage INT	    42

5.  Processor P4	    46
      General Discussion 	    46
        Step 1	    47
        Step 2 	    48
        Step 3 	    50
        Step 4	    51

6.  Processor P7	    56
      Motion of a viscous, hydrostatic fluid of constant
      density over irregular terrain 	    56
        The pressure force 	    58
        The friction force	    61
        The Coriol is force	    65
        The momentum equations 	    65
        The fluid depth equation 	    67
        Simplified model equations 	    76
        Solution of the u, v, and zwe equation 	    79
        Stage ZT	Y?	    82
        Stage DELRO 	    83
        Stage ETA	   86
        Stage PCD 	   89
        Stage IBC	   91
        Stage H1HO 	   94
        Stage SIG	   95
        Stage FLOMOD	   96
      Appendix A to Section 7 	   101
      Appendix B to Section 7 	   110
        Calculation of the BAR variables 	   120
        Calculation of the PRIME variables  	   122
        Calculation of the dependent variables uX and  h'  	   124

7.  Processor 8 	   131
      Introduction 	   131
      Derivation of basic equations 	   131
        Stage 2Q 	   147
        Stage PATH 	   161
        Stage WEWC 	   165
        Stage W2 	   172
                                  VI

-------
                        CONTENTS (continued)
        Stage WV	  182
     .   Mode 0:  Ap!=0	:	  182
        Mode 1:  Ap^l 	  185

8.  Processor P9 	  197
      Devel opment 	  197
        Stage DEN 	  197
        Stage ZEN 	  203
      Appendix to Section 8	  195

9.  Processor P10 	  207
      Stage DELH 	  208
      Stage S 	  211
      Stage ZTA 	  214

10. Processor Pll 	  219
      Summary	  219
      Introduction 	  220
      Average horizontal winds in a layer bounded by two
      arbitrary pressure surfaces 	  222
        Stage UV11	  247

11. Processor P12	  254
      Development	  254
        Stage K	  254
        Stage WWO 	  261
        Stage WW1	  264

12. Processor P15	  271
      Development	  271
        Step 1	  271
        Step 2	  275

13. The B-Matrix Compiler	  279
      Introduction 	  279
      The B-Matrix elements 	  280
      Preparation of terms in the F-equation 	  285
        Step 1	  287
        Step 2	  288
        Step 3 	  289
        Step 4	  290
        Step 5 	"	  290

References 	  296

-------
                                   FIGURES

Number                                                                   Page
1-1       Schematic illustration of the regional  model and the
          network of processors that supply it information
2
1-2       Modeling region in the NEROS study.   Each dot represents
          a grid cell ..................................................     6,

1-3       Illustration of Processor PI and its input and output             -;
          interfaces with the processor network ........................    29
                                                                             \
2-1       Illustration of Processor P2 and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network ........................    38

3-1       Schematic illustration of Processor P3 and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network .................    45

4-1       Schematic illustration of Processor P4 and its input and           >
          output interfaces with the processor network .................    55 ,;
                                                                             f
7-1       Illustration of the variables used in the flow model .........    57,'
                                                                             .-»
                                                                             ">!
7-2       Air parcel considered in the force balance analysis ..........    58;?
                                                                             >*

7-3       Friction forces on a fluid parcel of horizontal dimensions         •
          (Ax.Ay) bounded by zys and zt ................................   62 3
                                                                             s»
7-4       Projection of the horizontal rectangle (Ax, Ay) onto the            I,.
          surface H.,, centered at point Q
                   »5
7-2       Illustration of the 54 5 rain x 5 min cells that are  used  in        -
          the calculation of z+(I,J)  	    83?
                                                                             -!
7A-1      Illustration of the points  used in the  numerical  solution         '\
          of Eq. 7A-1.  Circled grid  points are those  from  which             -^,
          values T and S are taken to derive a biquintic expansion            ":
          of F(x',tn) about the point (IST,JST) (see Eq. 7-49) 	   104

7B-1      Flow chart of FIOMOO operations 	   119

7B-2      Grid network on which 5, jj , p. , S  , S , and S.  are computed.
          Different spatial derivative operators   Ax and Sy are required
          in these calculations as indicated  	   122

7B-3      Illustration of the southwest corner  zone and the west and
          south boundary zones of the model domain 	   129
                                      vm

-------
                              FIGURES (Continued)

Number                                                                   Page

7-6       Schematic illustration of Processor P7 and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network 	   130

3-1       Illustration of surfaces H2 and HS during situations in
          which convective clouds cover only a portion of the
          modeling region 	   132

>2       Illustration of the air parcel  trajectory that arrives  at
          point x  at hour ti-   Point x'  denotes the parcel's
          location at time t0 < tj. .. .7:	   141

->-3       (a)  Idealized profiles of mixing ratio q and potential
               temperature 9 in dry,  convective conditions.
          (b)  Second derivatives of the profiles illustrated in
               panel a 	   150

y-4       Illustration of th points (dots) at which measurements  of £
          are available; and the point z" at which a measure of d2£/dz2
          is desired.   Values of £ measured at the points z*,i=l,...4
          centered at z" are used to approximate £(z) in a polynomial
          about z" 	   151

3-6       Schematic illustration of Processor P8 and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network 	   196

3-1       Schematic illustration of Processor P9 and its interfaces
          with the processor network	   206

10-1      Illustration of the influence of terrain on model  layers 0,
          1 and 2 for given values of the penetration fractions aT1
          and OTO 	It	   211

10-2      Schematic illustration of Processor P10 and its interfaces
          with the processor network 	   218

11-1      Surfaces bounding layer p in which M soundings of the
          horizontal wind are available on the bottom surface p
          of Layer p	   224

11-2      Illustration of Processor Pll and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network 	   253

12-1      Illustration of the superposition of five hypothetical
          realization of an ensemble of point source plumes.  The
          width I of the ensemble of plumes is controlled by the
          character of the flow field ensemble.  The width a of
          the plumes in the ensemble is controlled by the turbulent,
          eddy diffusivity K	   256
                                      IX

-------
                              FIGURES (continued)

Number
                        -                                   •
12-2      Illustration of Processor P12 and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network
15-1      Illustration of Processor P15 and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network
                                                                     •  I
BMC-1     Schematic illustration of the B-Matrix Compiler (BMC).        -i
          The input interface is the Model  Input File (MIF).   The      -|
          output of the BMC is the "b-matrix tape"  which is read       g
          by the model code CORE (see Figure 1-1) ..................... . :1

-------
                                    TABLES
Number                                                                    Page
1-1       Summary of input and output variables of each step of
          Processor PI	     26
2-1       Pollutant species concentration (ppm) thaken to be
          representative of "clean" atmospheric conditions 	     31
2-2       Summary of input and output variables of each stage of
          Processor P2 	     37
3-1       Summary of input and output parameters of each step of
          Processor P3 	     44
4-1       Summary of input and output parameters in each step of
          Processor P4 	     53
7-1       Summary of the input and output requirements of each stage
          of Processor P7	,	     97
8-1       Summary of the input and output requirements of each stage
          of Processor P8 	    188
9-1       Summary of the input and output variables of each stage
          of Processor P9 and thei r sources 	    205
10-1      Summary of input and output parameters for Processor P10
          and thei r sources 	    215
11-1      Input requirements of stage UV11 and their sources 	    251
12-1      Summary of the expressions used to estimate the horizontal
          eddy diffusivity K  in each of the model's three layers 	    259
12-2      Input and output variables of each stage of Processor P12 	    267
15-1      Deposition resistances (sec/m) for S02 as a function of
          land use type n and stability L	    272
15-2      Deposition resistances (sec/m) for ozone as a function of
          1 and use type n and stabi 1 i ty L	    273
15-3      Deposition resistances of several pollutants relative to that
          of ozone over agricultural land.  (Deduced from data of Hill
          and Chamberlain, 1971) 	    274
                                      XI

-------
                              TABLES  (Continued)

Number                                                                    Page
15-1      Summary of the input and output  parameters of each  step
          of Processor P15 	   277
BMC-1     Definitions of parameters in  the Model  Input File (MIF)  	   294
                                      xn

-------
                               ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
     I am indebted to Dr.  Don Pelles of Computer Data Systems, Inc.  (CDSI) for
his invaluable assistance  in  developing the ideas on  the  flow field ensemble
presented  in  Section 10,  and to Ms.  Achamma  Philip,  also  of CDSI,  for her
steadfast  assistance in  developing the  numerical  boundary  condition  scheme
presented  in  Section 6.   I also want to acknowledge  the excellent work  of
Gayle Webster and Sherry McCoy of Systems Research and Development Corporation
(SRD), in preparing the manuscript.
                                     xm

-------
                                   SECTION 1

                                 INTRODUCTION

GENERAL DISCUSSION
                                                           •
     In Part  1  of this report, (Lamb 1983d) we  developed a theoretical  basis
for  a  regional-scale model  of photochemical air pollutants.   Realizing that
the operational  model would be very complicated and would require considerable
time and effort to develop, we proposed that, rather than integrate all  of the
various  components  of the  model  into a  single  unit,  we  construct   it  by
partitioning  the  mathematical  descriptions  of  small   groups  of  individual
physical and  chemical  processes  into discrete modules interconnected by fixed
communication channels.  Such  modular  design would facilitate troubleshooting
operations,  provide  a  natural division  of labor  for  the tasks  required  to
implement  the model, and  permit  continual  incorporation  of state-of-the-art
techniques  without  the need  to  overhaul  the  model  code  each  time   a new
technique was introduced.

     The  overall  structure  of the  proposed model  system  is  illustrated in
Figure 1-1.  The box labeled CORE represents the computer language analogue of
the  differential   equations  that  describe  all   the  governing  processes
considered in the  model  development in Part 1. (These equations are listed at
the  end  of this section.)   The  CORE module is  expressed  in a  very primitive
mathematical  form  in the  sense that its inputs  are matrices and vectors  whose

-------
ar^^tl

-------
elements are composites of meteorological  parameters,  chemical  rate constants,
etc.   For example,  the  link between CORE  and the output of the module labeled
CHEM, which contains the analogue of the chemical kinetics scheme,  consists of
-wo vectors P and Q, each of length N,  where N is the  total number  of chemical
jpecies simulated.   The n-th element  of  P  is  the net rate of  production of
:,pecies n  due  to  source  emissions and  chemical  reactions  among  all  other
--.pecies, and the n-th element of £ is the  net rate of  destruction of species n
;:ue  to  its chemical  interaction  with  all other species.  Thus, any chemical
nineties  mechanism  can be  incorporated  into   the model as  long  as  it  is
.xpressed  in  a form  that  is  compatible with the vector  interfaces  that  link
:ORE with the chemistry module CHEM.

     The remainder  of the  inputs  required by CORE  are  prepared  by the  module
designated BMC  (b-matrix compiler)  in  Figure 1-l.The  BMC performs  essentially
the same task that language compilers perform in computers.  It translates the
parameter  fields  in  the model  input  file  (MIF) into  the matrix  and  vector
elements  that  are  required  to  operate  the  algorithms  in  CORE.   These
parameters  include   layer   thicknesses,   horizontal   winds  in  each  layer,
interfacial volume fluxes,  and deposition velocities.

     The variables  in the  model  input file  (MIF) are supplied in  turn  by a
series  of  interconnected  processors,   labeled  P7, P8,  etc.  in  Figure  1-1,
several of  which are  rather complex models  in  themselves.   These processors
generate the wind  fields,  the interfacial  surfaces that  separate  the layers,
turbulence  parameters,   source  emissions,  and   many  other variables.   Their
inputs  consist  of  information  generated  by  other  processors in  the network

-------
and partially  processed  raw data  that are transferred through  the  processor
input file (PIF).

     The purpose of this  report  is to provide detailed specifications  of the
processor network  illustrated  in  Figure  1-1.   This  network will consist  of
both permanent  and interchangeable components.   The  permanent components are
the CORE, the  BMC,  the MIF and PIF,  the  communication  channels  that link the
processors and  the  PIF and MIF,  and the interfaces between the processors and
the communication channels.  All  processors,  i.e.,  PI,  P2, etc. and CHEM are
interchangeable components of  the  network.   Any or all  of the interchangeable
elements  can be replaced  by other  modules  as  long  as  the  replacements are
compatible with the communication  channel interfaces.  By "interface" we mean
the  set of  input  and output  variables  assigned  to  each processor.   We can
think of  each  processor  as being analogous to an electronic device that plugs
into a  multireceptacle socket  (the interface).   Each receptacle that provides
an  input  to the processor is connected  to a  fixed  signal  source,  and each
receptacle that receives  an  output from the processor acts as a signal source
on the  network of  communication  lines.  Considering the interchangeability of
the  processors and  chemistry module  CHEM, one  should  view  the  processor
designs that we develop in this report as "first generation"  versions that may
be replaced in the course of future tests and refinements of  the model.

     Neither the chemistry module nor the results  of any test simulations are
discussed  in this  report.   These topics will be  discussed in later parts of
this series  of reports.   In the following sections we present designs  of each
processor  in  the  network including  the  BMC.  Theoretical descriptions of the

-------
 -atnematics contained within  the module CORE were  given in Section 9 of  Part
     We will not  elaborate further  on  this part of the model  system in  this
 •'sort  other  than  to  describe  in  more detail  the numerical  scheme  that we
  ;oiy  to  the transport  and diffusion portion of the  model equations.  These
  :tails are given  in Appendix A of Section 6  which  describes Processor P7.

     Figure 1-2  shows the  region in the Northeastern  United States to which
   :  regional model  will  be applied.  Each  point in the figure represents the
   ;'er of  a grid cell in which values of all pollutant  species concentrations
   . computed by the model.
   :MARY OF PROCESSOR FUNCTIONS
     The  functions  performed   by  each  processor  in  the  model  network,
   •ustrated earlier in Figure 1-1 are summarized below.
 'rocessor PI
     Prepares  upper air  data  for use  by other  processors  in  the network.
Processor P2
     Uses surface air  monitoring data to  estimate  initial, lateral and  upper
boundary conditions on pollutant species concentrations.

-------
"^•%9
                                                                                                                           
                                                                                                                          CM
                                                                                                                           I
                                                                                                                           01

                                                                                                                           3
                                                                                                                           O5

-------
Processor P3
     Prepares surface meteoro.logical data for use in other processors.
Processor P4
     Estimates  surface  roughness,  Obukhov  length,  surface  heat flux,  and
friction velocity.
'rocessor P7
     Simulates the  depth  and motion of the nighttime  surface  inversion layer
and  the  depth  of  the  daytime  shear  layer  and  provides smoothed  terrain
elevations.
Processor P8
     Computes depths of  the  convective mixed layer and cloud layer, cloud and
turbulent entrainment  velocities  at the mixed  layer  top,  synoptic-scale mean
vertical  motion on  the  top surfaces  of model  Layers  2 and  3,  and layer
averaged horizontal wind divergences.
Processor P9
     Calculates  factors  for  correcting  the  chemical  rate  constants  for
temperature, density, and sunlight variations.

-------
Processor P10
     Transforms the source emissions inventory into  source  strength functions,
and  estimates  the  plume  volume  fraction parameter required  in the  subgrid
scale chemistry parameterization.
Processor Pll
     Computes  ensembles  of  volume  averaged horizontal winds  for each  model
layer (except  the  nighttime  surface inversion layer which is  treated  in P7).
Processor P12
     Calculates  layer  interface  turbulent  volume  fluxes;  horizontal  eddy
diffusivities; and cumulus cloud flux partition parameter.
Processor 15
     Computes pollutant species deposition velocities.
BMC
     Compiles  processor  network  outputs  for  input  into  the  model  core
algorithms.
                                                                                !
                                                                                I
                                     8

-------
£'JMMARY OF MODEL- EQUATIONS







     The equations upon which the regional -scale mode is based were derived  in



:.rt 1 of this  study.   The basic forms  of the governing equations in  each  of



-  a model's  four layers are summarized below.
  /er 1
 nere
               + M  3i + u  3i

                 M\    9A      ^    30






               * V4 C + Fo,l - Fl',lJ
               a cos<(»
         "  =  a
         a  =  earth radius at MSL (in meters)




         \  =  longitude




         0  =  latitude
          A  = a2 (Ad>AX) cos(})
          A((),AA = latitude, longitude grid cell dimensions



                = constants (A0 = J°   A\ = V°)
                                  0

-------
                       X+AA./2    <|>+A/2


                       - MAX [ZT(\',d>'),
               subgrid scale fluxes of c (see Part 1, Section  7)    x
  'c'>,  '
-, = all chemical, rainout and washout processes.


<$>-, = all emissions of c in Layer 1 (includes stacks  and  surface
       sources above nighttime radiation inversion.
,, , = layer averaged horizontal wind components
             (u = east-west component, positive eastward),
             (v = north-south component, positive  northward).
Fl,l = (1'CTT1) [(1 * 2)WLn



p  = deposition velocity of species  c


a-n(A,<|>,t) = fraction of surface H,  penetrated by terrain
        w    zn           wm - w
           +    ^ + erf C-^-
                                W             W

j,    -  \ wm  "  ^1»  neutral  and unstable conditions;
wR1  -  |  ui     i

            Hi>  ( =  given inversion layer depth growth rate), stable
                            10

-------
wn, = mean vertical velocity on H, (terrain induced component
 U1   excluded)                  *"

cr   = rms vertical turbulence on H, ( = 0 in stable cases)
w   = threshold of cumulus "root" updraft velocity on
   o , w   (see Layer 2 equations)
    c   c
          •)  I     _+2
erf(x) = —  1    e l  dt
 Fo,l =
ov   = fraction of surface H  in given grid cell penetrated by
       terrain
       Ozone:


          Fo(03) = <03>1 W-X- " V+
               - (1 - a)
                               0,   if
                                3V ^ "  NOV , otherwise
                                  PO  + v
Nitric Oxide:

   FQ(NO) = 1
- NO
                                                 - a)
               - (1 - a)
                                           - 0)   , if
                                                   , otherwise

-------
                 Nitrogen Dioxide:
                    FQ(N02)  = lW_A_ - N02
                         - (1 - a)
                                         - o)

                                        , if SNQ > v£03
                                                          2  , otherwise
                 all other species, x-
               F0(X) = iW_\_ - xw+\+(l - 4)(1 - a) - (1 - a)Kx * ? )(1 + p
                    a =
tjjcr
c
ft
w2 - w
-i - ffl/\n
1 - ac f0/AO
     See Layer 0 equations for specification of O,, NO, N02, x» w+, X+, etc.
Layer 2
at
2
2
                                                     2
                                                               :'>,
                                         l,2 -  2,
                    = 2
          V2(X,(p,t) = a2cos4>                  {22(Xl,0',t) - MAX  CzT(X',(i)!)
                                A-M/2    (JJ-A0/2
                                                                 ',f ,t)]}dfdA'
                                     12

-------
     2
                 subgrid scale fluxes of c (see Part 1, Section 7)

     2 _



     2  = all chemical, rainout and washout processes in Layer 2



     2  = source emissions in Layer 2 (if any)



     2, 2 = Layer 2 averaged winds.
P      o_(w2 - w )  _                 aL   f

 2,2 =   1-a     2 1* ' A6 [~ (1 ' ac)3  ' CTcCc + 2]
Fl,2 = anP2 + (1 " CT1^1W1 + (i " 2)Wlm + (2 "
Wl'Wlm' see Layer 1;  Dl' see Part 1> Eq-  4~


a  = fractional area coverage of cumulus clouds



w  = mean upward velocity in cumulus clouds



fe
•5 - turbulent entrainment rate of inversion air into mixed layer
 « - mean vertical velocity (mean of both terrain induced component wT2
     and divergent component w)
-~ = z0 = local time rate of change of mixed layer top
 Ot    L.
  = fraction of cloud air from surface layer



     0
-------
                 w2 - w
          vc = - -f
          c, c1,  4, w+,  A.+ = See Layer 0 equations
Layer 3
                        9A      (p          30




                33 .  ,,  83 .   A r
                                                  _
                                              2,3    3,3
3
     V3(A,<|»,t) = a2cos<|»
     Z2(\,,t) = mixed layer top


          f.t) = model top
               subgrid scale flux of c (see Part 1, Section 8)




     3 = all chemical (wet and dry) rainout and washout processes


     3, 3 - layer averaged winds
     F           W2 " Wc          -                 322
      2,3 = ac C  1 - a  + fe/^](cc - 3) * 3 ^
                                     14

-------
            3      ,  if  dfij/dt < 0  ;
                       _             .
                  3) dH3/dt + 3 —  , otherwise
       CM = concentration of species c above z3



       dhL/dt = given  volume flux through model top surface
        c = (1 -  4<)2

            where c1  and  c are defined with the Layer 0 variables.
er 0


  <03>0 = (1 -  C)
  0           w.\,<03>1

   3
        (  °.  if SNO  > vhj

  °3  'I
           3V " W^   '  otnerwl'se
  0 = (1 -  C)  NO
   N°   =
                                  15

-------
               + v(NO -  03)   ,  if SNO  >vC03
0 =
NO,
          NQ2v + 03v
                             ,  otherwise
                                 ,  if
'NO'" 3
                           2     ,  otherwise
Species x other than 03> NO, and N02:





         o = (3
   X   =
         w+A+ * (1 - OP,
Parameters:
     \+ = %[1 - erf (-r
                        0 N-J
                                16

-------
           O            '9
            W           Z^
             0      -     0
w. = -*0 - — exp
                          wo
             [1 - erf (
                           wo
    v = u* (plume entrainment velocity)
   £  = plume volume fraction
  
-------
                                   SECTION 2
                                 PROCESSOR PI                                    I
GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This Processor performs a  number of standard operations on the raw rawin
data to put them into the forms  required by the higher level  processors in the
network.   It  operates  on the  rawin  data  only.    We  assume that  the  "raw"
rawin record at the m-th station consists of a sequence of Im "vectors"
          [SPD,DIR,T,TD,p]in), 1=1,...Im                                  (1-1)
where the i-th  vector represents the wind speed (m/sec), direction (degrees),
temperature  (°C),  and   dew  point  depression  (°C)  at  pressure  level  p    J
(millibars) at a given station m.  The number of observation levels I  in each    I
record can  vary from  station to station  and from  hour to hour.   The steps    |
necessary to convert the raw data into the desired forms follow.                  f
                                                                                  \
Step 1
     Convert  the speed  and  direction  (SPD.OIR)^  into  cartesian components
(u,v) at each level i and at each station m by
                                     18

-------
 /here
          9.  = (DIR. )-(at/360).                                        (1-3)
            i ni        ini
 hese  values  must be  processed  further (in step 10)  before  recording in the
 'IF.
 •:tep 2
     Convert the  temperature  and dew point depression TD into the water vapor
.nixing  ratio  q (mass  of water  per  total  mass  of air)  at  each level  i  and
station m by
          qim =     -e                                                   (1"4)
where
          R    =  0.461 joule g"  °K"
          L    -  2500 joule g~  (latent heat of vaporization)
          e    =  40 mb (saturation vapor pressure at T )
          TQ   =  29 + 273 = 302°K (reference temperature)
           D-  =  T.  - TD.  + 273 (dew point temperature at level i, station m)
          p.   =  pressure (mb) at level i, station m.
     The mixing  ratio q.   and dew  point T.  are  outputs  of this stage  and
require further processing in Step 6.
                                     19

-------
Step 3
     Compute the  relative humidity RH-   for each  level . i and  station m  by
where  e   is  found from  (1-5) by  replacing  the  dew  point I-,   with  the
temperature T. .
Step 4
     Convert  the  pressure  p^ at  the levels  i=l,2,...I  of  the upper  air
observation  at station  m  to altitudes  z.   (AGL)  by  first  converting  the
temperature measurements T.  to virtual temperatures
                                       ).                                d-7a)  j
Then                                                                            |
where
          p.   =  pressure at level j (j=0 represents ground level) at station m;
          z.   =  elevation (AGL) of observation level j at station m;
          g    =  9.8 m sec"  (gravity);
                            -2   _1
          Rd   =  287 m2 sec    K   (gas constant for dry air)
          T  .  =  virtual temperature (°K) at level j, station m.
                                     20

-------
Step 5
     Let z   be  the known elevation (MSL in meters) of the m-th rawin station,
and  let  pQm and TVQ(n be the  station  pressure and virtual temperature.  Using
(1-7) we now calculate the sea-level pressure at station m:
          p_-,m = sea-level pressure at station m (in millibars)
and we calculate the geopotential height Qm (m2/sec2) of the 1000 mb surface:
          *om ' 92m * RdTvoJn OTJ •                                    d'9
Using the *om value from the previous observation time, say, t-At, compute
Record 4>om and $Qm in the PIF.
Step 6
     At this  stage  the virtual temperature,  relative  humidity,  dew point and
mixing  ratio  are known  at each  elevation z. in  the  sounding (from step 3).
These data should now be interpolated to give semi-continuous  soundings,  e.g.,
T (z) and  q.,(z)  of virtual temperature and mixing ratio  at  each  rawin  station
m.  That is, we convert
                      =>
                                      21

-------
                                                                                  I
where
          z = zm + nAz  ,  n=0,...
Az=50 meters, and
                       5000-z
                             m
                         SO
                                                                       (1'10e)
The third-order interpolation scheme described in Processor P8 (see Eqs.  8-56,
8-60,  ...69,  and 8-70)  should  be used  in  performing  the  transformations
indicated by Eqs.  (1-10).   Record the  T f  qm, TDm,  and RHm values  for each  of
the z given by (l-10d) in the PIF.
Step 7
     The pressure-height pairs1 (p^,  z.m)  should be transformed  into  a semi-
continuous sounding as in Step 6 above.   In this task the sequence begins with
the sea-level pressure,  followed  by the station pressure, and the observation
levels aloft, i.e.,
                                                    =>
where
          z=nAz, n=0,l,...100;
(1-lla)
(1-llb)
and  Az=50 meters.   In performing  the  interpolation  (1-lla),  an exponential
formula should be employed based on the hydrostatic condition

          Ap_  _ _
 (1-12)
                                     22

-------
 "ecord the pm values at each z given by (1-llb) in the PIF.
 ;:ap 8
     Using  the P_(z)  profile  obtained in Step  7,  determine the geopotential
      -2
  i2sec  ) of  the 850, 700, and  500  millibar surfaces at each station m.  For
  /700)m and *(500)m*

Step 9
     Using  the virtual  temperature  profile Tvm(z)  from  step 6,  Eq.  l-10a
above,  and the  pressure  profile p  (z)  from Step  7,  Eq.  1-11,  compute the             j
potential  temperature profile  6m(z)  for each  level  z  defined  by  (l-10d):
          V« - Tm WCgs,)-
                                                                                           'I
                                                                                           I I
where p  is in~millibars, as above, and Tm   is  in degrees  Kelvin.   Now  compute
the air density at each of the same levels z using
                                     23                                                     !

-------
                                      n    -2  „  -1
where pm is  in  millibars  and Rd=287 m2sec   °K  ,  Tvm  is  in  °K,  and  p=kg  m
From 9 and p compute the profile a  (z)  of static  stability from

                   - [8m ( z+Az ) -6m ( z- Az ) ] • 10"
          CTsm(z) =
                                  _3                           _2
With p  in millibars  and p in kg m   , a   has  units  of m4sec2kg  .   Record  the
profiles 9 (z),p (z) and cr  (z)  in  the PIF for each  rawin station  m.
Step 10

     Interpolate the wind  components  uim and v^ of Eq.  (1-2) above to obtain
the profile
          vim
where z takes the values given by (lOd).
Stage INT

     The raw rawin data are generally available only at 12-hour intervals,
but the output variables produced by this processor, PI, are required each
hour by processors further along in the network.  Therefore, an interpolation
of all output variables must be performed to provide values at hourly intervals.
The specific interpolation formula that is used for this purpose is left to the
discretion of the user.
                                     24

-------
    Table 1-1 summarizes the inputs and outputs of each step of Processor PI
i.nd Figure 1-3 illustrates the processor and its data interfaces.
                                    25

-------
                   Table 1-1  Summary of input and  output  variables
                              of each step of Processor  PI.
Input
Variable
               Description
                      Source
Step
Output
Variable
Description
SPDim
wind speed (ms  ) at   RAW
level i at rawin
station m.

Wind direction         RAW
(compass degrees) at
level i at rawin
station m
           u. (t.)   east-west wind
                     component at level
                     i,  station m,  hour t^.

           v. (tk)   north-south wind
                     component at level
                     i,  station m,  hour t^.
          pressure (mb) at       RAW
          level i, station m.
          dew point depression   RAW
          (°C) at level i,
          station m.

          temperature (°C) at    RAW
          level i, station m.
                                             q- (tk)   mixing ratio
                                                       (dimensionless)  at
                                                       level  i, station m,
                                                       hour t^.

                                             Tn. (tu)  dew point temperature
                                              mm  K   at level i, station m,
                                                       hour t,..
pim

-------
Table 1-1  Summary of input and output variable
           of each step of Processor PI.   (Continued)
Input


Variable Description Source Step
zm
in

p


worn
V Ulll
vim
V 1 III
Him
i in
RHim
i HI
2im
TDim
p.

zim
1 III


"™(z)
Pm(z)
m
T (z)
vm





elevation (meters,
msl) of rawin
station m
station pressure
(mb) at station m.

virtual temperature
(°C) at station m.
see above

see above

see above

see above
see above
see above

see above



pressure at elevation
z(MSL) over station m.
see above

see above






RAW 5


RAW


Step 4

Step 4 6

Step 2

Step 3 .

Step. 4
Step 2
RAW 7

Step 4



Step 7 8
Step 7 9

Step 6






Output
Variable
*om(V
Ulll K.

*om(tk}
Ulll N



Tvm(z'V
VIII ls\
qm(z,tk)
III N.
RHm(z,tk)
III N
TDm(z'V

Pm(z,tk)
III K




!(850)m
!(700)m
*(500)m
e.(z)
in



Pm(z,tk)
m K



Description
geopotential (m2s~2)
of 1000 mb surface
at station m, hour tk<
time rate of change
(m2sr3 ) of geo-
potential of 1000 mb
surface at station m.

Temperature, mixing
ratio, relative humidity,
and dew point profiles
at station m resolved
to Az=50m as prescribed
by Eqs.
(l-10d,e) at hour tR.

pressure (mb) at
elevation z(msl) above
station m, resolved to
Az=50m as prescribed
by Eqs. (l-10d,e) at
hour t..
geopotential (m2sec~2 )
of the 850, 700, and
500mb surfaces at
station m.
potential temperature
(°K) at elevation z
over station m, resolved
to Az=50m as prescribed
by Eqs. (l-10d,e).
o
air density (kgm~ ) at
elevation z (resolved
as above) over station m,
hour t. .
                                        sm
                         27
:. ) static stability
 K (m4s2kg-2) at elevation
   z  at  station m, hour t..

-------
               Table 1-1.  Summary of  input and output variables
                          of each step of Processor PI. (Concluded).
Input
Variable
     Description
Source
Step
Output
Variable
Description
uim
 im
see above

see above
 Step 1      10

 Step 1
           u(x ,z,t.>  east-west and nor
             ~m    K   south wind
                    )  at elevation 2 (a*
                       given by Eqs.  1-K
                       at location x  of
                       station m, at hour
                       V
                                              ^m''
                                             [also
                                         28

-------
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
        29

-------
                                   SECTION 3
                                 PROCESSOR P2

GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This processor determines  initial,  upper and lateral  boundary conditions
on all' of  the pollutant species simulated by  the  regional  model.   Presently,
it is impossible to..estimate these conditions with  an-accuracy  anywhere
near  that  of  available  emissions  estimates,  because:    (1)  the  pollutant
monitoring data from which the initial and boundary conditions  must be derived
are  few  and  nonuniformly  distributed,   (2)  no  measurements are  routinely
available aloft, and  (3) most of the intermediate pollutant species that must
be treated to  simulate  the chemistry  properly  are not measured  at all.   In
addition,  the model requires  conditions on the cell  averaged concentrations
but only point measurements are made at the monitoring sites.

     The  problems  caused  by  the  paucity  of  data  can  be  mitigated  by
initializing  the  model  on a "clean"  day,  such as  a day immediately following
the  passage of a cold front,  and by  choosing  a model domain  that is large
enough that  the quantities of pollutants  emitted  by sources just outside the
model  boundaries  are  small  compared to  those  generated within the  simulation
area itself.   In  such a case, we can  use  "clean atmosphere"  conditions  for the
initia!7 upper and lateral  boundary  values  of each species.  Table 2-1 lists
these  values for  each  of  the  23 pollutants  modeled  by the  Demerjian-Schere
(1979) kinetics scheme that we  have been  using during  the  development phase  of
the  regional  model.
                                     30

-------
        Table 2-1.   Pollutant species concentrations  (ppm)  taken to be
                    representative of "clean"  atmospheric conditions*.

                    (Notation:   1.000-01 = 10"1.)
NO
HC2
HN02
H202
H02
R20
4.
3.
3.
8.
2.
2.
499-04
390-03
473-05
784-05
078-05
452-09
N02
HC3
HN03
0
H04N
R102
1.
7.
7.
1.
7.
1.
404-03
679-03
215-04
284-10
583-06
550-05
CO
HC4
PAN
N03
RO
R202
1.
6.
3.
5.
5.
5.
010-01
911-04
808-04
434-07
848-08
319-06
HC1
03
RN03
HO
R02

1.
3.
1.
3.
5.

084-03
522-02
004-06
734-07
578-05

"Values  reported  here  were  obtained  by  initializing the  Demerjian-Schere
 (1979) 23-species  kinetics mechanism  with the  following  species concentra-
 tions and allowing reactions for 90 minutes in full sun conditions:

     NO = .OOlppm,  N02 =  .002ppm, total  non-methane hydrocarbon  = .05ppm,
     CO = .Ippm, 03 = .02ppm, all other species = Oppm.

 Hydrocarbon classes are as follows:
     HC1  = olefin,  HC2  = paraffin, HC3 = aldehydes, HC4 = aromatics.  Initial
     values  of each  of these  lumped  species were  obtained from  the  total
     nonmethane hydrocarbon concentration using the speciation method
     suggested by Demerjian (1983).
                                    31

-------
     The   problems   caused   by  the   unavailability   of   volume-averaged
concentration  data   cannot  be  eliminated   because  there   is   no  unique
relationship  between  the  concentration  values measured  at  one  or  several
discrete points within  a  given volume of space and the concentration averaged
over  that  volume.   This  is  the   so-called  subgrid-scale  closure  problem
encountered in all modeling studies  in which it is  impossible to choose a grid
size small  enough  to resolve the smallest spatial  variations in the simulated
variables.  In Part  1,  Section 5, we developed  a  crude subgrid-scale closure
                                                                                 "I?-
scheme  for  use in treating  the pollution chemistry.   Proceeding  along lines   ^|
similar  to  those  described there we could formulate  an  approximate  way  of    f
extracting  volume-averaged concentration  estimates from  point measurements.    $
                                                                                  f
However, we will  not  attempt this   here  because the  improvement  in accuracy    |
gained  in the initial  concentration  fields would probably  not be  significant    ;|L
enough  to warrant  the development and implementation efforts.  Perhaps future    ||
modeling studies can investigate this problem in detail if the need is great.    "I
                                                                                  1
                                                                                  ;.K.
     In  the remainder  of  this section we  outline a  procedure for obtaining    J
                                                                                   -Tt
rough estimates of initial and boundary conditions on pollutant concentrations     -\
in  situations where the  "clean atmosphere"  assumption  does  not apply.  An
important point to note in the preparation of initial and boundary conditions
is that, due to inaccuracies and uncertainties in the methods  used, the set of
concentrations  obtained  for  any given  grid  cell  or boundary   point will
generally   not  be   consistent  with  chemical  equilibrium   conditions.   For
example,~if one  deduces concentration values  for  Os,  NO,  N02  and olefin from
the  monitoring data and assigns "nominal"  or  zero  values to  all  the  other
species  included  in   the  chemical  kinetics  scheme,  one  would  find upon
initializing  the  model with  these   values  that  a period  of rapid  chemical
                                    32

-------
transformations  immediately ensues.   These  rapid  changes indicate  that the
concentration  conditions  selected for  the initial   state  do not  represent a
state  near equilibrium.   These  spurious  reactions  are an  artifact  of the
chosen  set  of  concentrations  and  are  not  representative  of the  chemical
activity that  occurs  just after the initial moment.  This is analogous to the
initialization problem  in meteorological  models where failure to prescribe an
initial  state that  is in  geostrophic balance  results  in the  generation of
spurious gravity waves.

     The transient concentration  variations excited by  errors  in  the initial
state  diminish  the  accuracy of  the  model's  predictions within  some finite
period  following  the  initial  instant  tQ.   They   also  exact  a  significant
penalty  in  computer  time.   Because  when  the  chemical  state  is  far  from
equilibrium, the mathematical algorithm in the model that handles the chemical
rate equation  must utilize many small time steps to track the approach of the
state  of  the  system  to equilibrium.  Since this operation  must be performed
initially at  every grid point in the  model  and at  all boundary points at all
times  where  the boundary condition specification  is  inexact,  a considerable
portion of  the computation  time  required by the model  can  be  wasted on this
fictitious  phenomenon.   The remedy  is  to  use  the  initial  concentrations
deduced  from   the  monitoring data  as  the initial  state  in a  batch  reactor
model; to  run that  model for  a  time  long  enough   for  the  chemical  state to
settle down  to  a  point where  changes are occurring  relatively slowly  (say,
time scales ~10 min); and then to use the concentrations of each species  given
by  the batch  reactor  model  at that point as  the   initial  conditions in the
regional model.   The  same  procedure  should  be used  to obtain the upper and
lateral boundary conditions.
                                    33

-------
Stage LBC:  Estimating lateral boundary conditions from monitoring data
(1)  Collect  hourly surface  monitoring data  for  each  species  x-(ppm) .i  =
     1,...IMAX  from all  stations within  20  km  either side  of each  of the
     regional model's four lateral boundaries.   Each station within this 40 km
     wide boundary  zone  is  treated as though it lies on the model boundary at
     the point closest to the station location.
(2)  Use a  cubic  spline  or  other acceptable interpolation formula to estimate
     concentrations %.  (*B,  4B,  t)(ppm) at  each grid point  (Ag, <|>B)  on the
     boundary.  Here (A,) denotes the longitude and latitude of a cell  center
     on the boundary of the regional model  domain.
(3)  Using  the  functions x ^ obtained  in  step  2,  estimate  layer  averaged
     concentrations along the boundaries as follows:

            = B  Xj (Xo, +B, t),    11=1,2,3               (2-1)
                              "          °         i=l,...IMAX
     where the B  are empirical constants to be estimated from the NEROS field
                n
     experiment data.
(4)  For each  hour  tm,  each boundary point (\B, <)>B), and each layer n perform
     the batch reactor equilibration process, described in the introduction to
     this section,  to the set of concentrations g» t)>n, i=l,...IMAX
     given  by (2-1).  Record the results  in  the  ICBC  portion  of  the model
     input file MIF (units = ppm for each species).
STAGE 1C:  Estimating initial conditions from monitoring data
(1)  Collect surface monitoring data for all pollutant species at all  stations
     within  the  regional model  domain at the initial hour t  (=1200 EST)  of
                                    34

-------
     the period  to be  simulated.   Noon is chosen as the  initialization hour
     because,  at  this   time,   pollutants  are  usually  distributed  nearly
     uniformly in the mixed layer and initial  values for Layers 1 and 2 can be
     equated with minimum error.
 I)  In places where more than one monitoring station lies within a grid cell,
     compute a weighted average of the reported values taking into account the
     proximity of  each station  to  sources and  the distribution  of land use
     types  within  that cell.   For example,  if  one monitoring  site is  in  a
     rural area  and  70% of that cell is  in rural  land use, the rural station
     would  be   given   a   weight  of  0.7  in   computing   the  cell  average
     concentration.
(3)  Fit  a  two-dimensional   function  to  the  finite  set  of  cell  averaged
     concentrations obtained in step 2 and from this function derive values of
     the concentration of each measured pollutant species at all grid cells in
     the model region.
(4)  Subject each  set  of  concentrations i=l,...IMAX obtained in step 3 to the
     batch reactor equilibration  process.   Call  the results of this operation
     X-j(X,  4,  t )  where   (X,  <)>)  ranges   over  all   grid  points  in  the model
     region.   Now  record  the following initial  layer averaged concentrations
     (ppm) in the ICBC portion of MIF:
                       Xi(A, 4>, V                                      (2-2)
     2 = X1(A, , t0)                                      (2-3)
     3 = SjXfC*. + , V                                    (2-4)
     where  |.  is an  empirical constant  to be  derived  from the  NEROS field
     experiment data.
                                    35

-------
Stage UBC:   Upper boundary conditions
(1)  In the first generation  model  we will use the "clean" atmosphere species
     concentrations  listed in Table 2-1 for the upper  boundary conditions x^
     for., all  cells  and  all  hours.    Record  these  in the  ICBC  portion of
     MIF(units = ppm for all  species), i.e.
                     t} = XCLEAN, i
                                                  all (X, 
-------
               Table 2-2  Summary of input and output variables of each
                          stage of Processor P2.
Input
Variable
Description
Source
Stage
Output
Variable
Description
X,'i,(t )   concentration (ppm)
  *  m    of i-th pollutant
          at hour t  measured
          at surface monitoring
          station k=l,...K.
RAW
LBC
                           average concen-
                           tration (ppm) of
                           i-th pollutant
                           in layer n=l,2,3
                           at boundary cell
                           (\B, <)>g) at hour

                            m'
Xik(tm)   see Stage LBC input.
RAW
ic
            ,  n
average concentration
(ppm) of i-th pollut-
ant in layer n=l,2,3
in grid cell (\,$) at
the initial instant
v
          see
RAW
UBC
             , 0>,
concentration (ppm)
of i-th pollutant
at top surface of
model over grid
cell (\,4>) at hour
                                                                     m
                                         37

-------
CM a.
o- i-
           1YY
            c
            A

            E
            m
c
A
o
             V
                              3
                              Q.
                              *j
                              3
                              O
                              •o
                              c
                              CO

                              3 .
                              0. j*

                              .£ 5

                              51
                              _ Q)

                              = 5
                              « o
                              ^
                              o
                              CO w

                              8 2"
                               0)
                              Is
                              s °
                              2.S
                               15
                              CN
             38

-------
                                   SECTION 4
                                 PROCESSOR P3
GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This processor performs standard operations on the surface meteorological
data  to  put them  into forms  required  by the higher  level  processors  in the
network.    The  surface and  rawin data  are  treated in  separate  processors to
facilitate  future  alterations  in  the  data  analyses and  to permit  easier
incorporation of additional data.
     We assume that at given time intervals (not necessarily hourly intervals)
the surface observations consist of the set

          [SPD,DIR,T,TD,P]n

where  n  denotes  the  surface  station,  whose location is  x ; and  the other
variables   represent  wind   speed   (ms   ),   direction   (compass  degrees),
temperature  (°C),  dew point  depression  (°C)  and  station  (not sea-level)
pressure (mb).
Step 1
     Convert  the  wind  speed  and  direction  into  north-south  and east-west
components as follows:

          un = 0(xn) = - SPDn-sin 9n                                     (3
          vn = v(xn) = - SPDn-cos 6n                                     (3

                                    39

-------
where
          9n = DIRn*(27t/360)-
The components (&n,v ) are  outputs  of this processor for  each  time interval
Step 2
     Convert the  temperature and dew  point depression  to  mixing ratio,  dew
point  temperature,  relative humidity  and  virtual   temperature  as  follows:
               0.622e
          q  =      —  (=mixing ratio)                                 (3-2a)
                pn  n
where
                     111

          R   =  0.461 joule g"1 °K~1
          L   -  2500 joule g"
          eQ  =  40mb (saturation vapor pressure at temperature T )
          TQ  =  302 °K
          Pn  =  station pressure (mb)
and
          TDn = Tn " TDn * 273   (=dew point temperature)               (3-2b)
                   p -e
          RHn = qn On62|||    (relative humidity)                       (3-2c)
                         sn
where e    is  obtained from (3-2a') by replacing the dew point temperature T-
in the formula with the dry bulb temperature Tn (expressed in °K);

          TV  = T  (1 + 0.61qn)  (=virtual temperature)                 (3-2d)
                                    40

-------
where T  (and hence T  ) is in °K.
The   mixing   ratio   q   (dimensionless)   and  the   relative  •humidity  RH
(dimensionle'ss)  can  be recorded in PIF  (they  are  outputs of this processor).
Before  recording the dew point and virtual temperature in PIF, they should be
converted to degrees Celsius as follows:
          TDn <°c> = V°
          Tvn<°c> = Tvn<°K>
where TQn (°K) is from Eq. 3-2b and Tyn (°K) is from (3-2d).
Step 3
     Let 2n  be the elevation (meters, MSL) of surface station n.  Compute the
geopotential of the 1000 mb surface
          *on ' 9*n * RdTvn ln I5B5                                       <3'3>
                        I
where Tyn  is from  (3-2d) above  (in  °K)  and Rd =  287  m2s"  °K~ .   Using  the
value of *   from the previous time interval, estimate  the  time  rate of  change
of 4>   by
    on

               *on = C*on(t) ' Oon^^"1                             (3"4)
     Compute the  sea-level  pressure p,.-, at each station  site x  ,n=l,2,...N as
follows.
                            p2- ]                                          (3-5)
                            vn
                                    41

-------
where p   is the station pressure  (mb)  and  all  other variables have  the same
definitions  as  above.    If  the  surface  temperature  T    undergoes  large
variations between day  and  night,  a 12-hour moving averaged  temperature must
be  used  in  (3-5)  to avoid fictitious variations  in  the estimated  sealevel
pressure.
Step 4
     Compute the surface potential temperature and air density at each station
          6n = Tn  (M2}0.286   (-p0tential temperature)
                     ^
                                        (3-6)
                      10~
                        -2
                  vn
(=density, kg m
r3)
(3-7)
where T    is  from Eq.  3-2d and  is  in  degrees Kelvin (°K), p   is  the station
pressure in millibars and
          Rd = 287 m2sec
                        "2
                          "
Record 0n(°K) and pR (kg m" ) in PIF.
Stage INT
     Values of each  of the parameters produced by this processor are required
at hourly  intervals  by higher level processors in the network.  However, most
of  the  inputs  to  this  processor,  P3,  may  only  be  available   at  3-hour
intervals.   Thus,  it is necessary to interpolate each of the parameter values
produced in this   processor by some  means   adequate to  produce   reasonable
                                    42

-------
estimates of  parameter values each  hour.   Stage  INT  is intended  to  perform
this task.   We leave the detailed specification of the  interpolation algorithm
to the discretion of the user.

     The inputs  and outputs of  each step  of  Processor P3 are  summarized  in
Table 3-1 and illustrated schematically in Figure 3-1.
                                    43

-------
                  Table  3-1   Summary of input and output parameters
                             of  each step of Processor P3.
Input
Variable
SPD
n
DIR
n
Tn
Description
surface wind speed
(m/s) at station n
surface wind direction
(compass degrees) at
station n.
surface temperature
fOr^ = +• <-4-^-f -inn n
Source
RAW
RAW
RAW
Output
Step Variable
1 u (t )
W
2 «n
-------
YYYYYYYYYYY
                            (A
                            03
                            O
                            CD
                            k»
                            CD
                            b
                            Q.
                            ^*
                            3
                            O
                            TJ
                            C
                            CD
                            **
                            3
                            Q.
                            w
                            ^rf

                            •o
                            C
                            CD
                            CO
                            Q.
                            w
                            O
                            (A
                            (0
                            0)
                            O
                            - o
                            o I
                            s ®
                            .2 c
                            i: co
                            (O (0

                            18
                            .2 o.
                            (D O
                            O>
                            iZ
            45

-------
                                   SECTION 5
                                 PROCESSOR P4

GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This processor estimates the  surface roughness z ,  the Obukhov length L,
the  surface  heat flux Q,  and the  friction velocity u*  in each cell  of the
NEROS  grid.   The  last three parameters  are treated  in  a  single  processor,
rather than distributed among several, because they are interrelated variables
and  the  value estimated  for one can be altered by a change in the method used
to  estimate  another.   The  method  we  use  in this  first  generation processor
network  to estimate Q is based on the scheme proposed by Golder (1972).  More
refined  methods  have  recently been  reported, e.g.,  Holtslag and  van Ulden
(1983),  and  these  should  be considered  in  the development  of  the  second
generation model.
     We  should also point  out that the estimates of the friction velocity u*
that we outline here are derived from the raw surface wind observations, i.e.,
(u,v), rather  than  from the  flow  fields  that are finally  used in  the model,
i.e., the output (i,  ±) of Pll.  To utilize data from the latter source
would  result  in  complex interconnections of  Pll with other  processors that
require  L, Q  and u* values.  The difficulty of operating such  a system cannot
be  justified  considering  that the  method of  estimating u*  is  itself  quite
crude, and that  the flow fields that Pll generates are constrained  locally in
space-time by the observed winds.  That is, the observed surface winds  that we
will  use here  to estimate u* are explicitly incorporated into  the  flow fields
generated by Pll.

                                    46

-------
     Each of  the  steps below  must be  performed for  each  cell  in  the NEROS
grid.
Step 1
     Determine  the  wind  speed and  exposure classes  C   and C   for  use  in
                                                        W       c
estimating  the  Obukhov  length L.   First,  using  the locations  XR of  the  N
surface meteorological stations (n=l,2,...N) and the observed winds (un>v_)  at
each  station  and at  each hour t  ,  estimate the wind speed  u   in the given
grid  cell  at hour  t  by  performing a weighted  average of  the  observations
(un,vn)  at  the  nearest  sites xn.   The  r   weighting  formula  (given  by  Eq.
11-88) may be used.   The wind speed class for this grid cell is  now defined to
be
                  |u|  m    <            _x

                   4, otherwise

Next, using the  fraction cr^y (x,tm) of  local  sky coverage by all cloud types
and  the  local land use  distribution T(x,j), where x refers  to  points on the
NEROS grid  and j=l,...10  refers  to  the  10  land use types  (see  P15), compute
the exposure class C :
                   '3,  aCT < 0.2
                    2,  0.2 < aCT < 0.7
                    1,  0.7 <  0.5
                                    \ nighttime hours only
                   .-2,  a   < 0.5
                                    47

-------
«- -.«. ^  of
greater than 30%, i.e. ,
                   of C  to                                  usage  (
                   > 0.30, C (x) > 1
                           6~  ~                                (4-3a)
                                                -             --
          if T(x,7)>0.6,  Ce(x) =        ' daylj9ht hours
                               L    0, night.

                                                    m J

         L = [ (v * v3)  • *o(bl"' "
where
         «1 =  0.004349,
         a2 =  0.003724,
        4 =  0.5034,
        b2 =  0-2310,
        b  =  0.0325.
                    s
                           -SignCCJ  ,
                             48

-------
where
                        1, if Ce > 0;
                        0,.ifCe = 0;
                       -l, if Ce < 0,
Step 2
     Estimate  the  effective surface  roughness  ZQ  in  each cell  of the NEROS
grid using the following expression
                  10            10
          ZQ(X) = I T(x,n)zo(n)/I T(x,n)                                 (4-5)

where T(x,n)  is  the fraction of the  NEROS  cell  centered at x that is in land
use  category  n,  with  n (=1,2,,.. .10)  referring  to the  following use types:
1.  Urban Land                6,  Mixed Forest Land (including Forested Wetland)
2.  Agricultural Land         7.  Water
3.  Rangeland                 8.  Land Falling Outside the Study Area
4.  Deciduous Forest Land     9.  Non-Forested Wetland
5.  Coniferous Forest Land   10.  Mixed Agricultural Land and Rangeland

In Eq. 4-5  the  surface roughness zQ(n) associated with each land use type are
the  following (based  on  the  values  suggested by  Sheih  et  al.,  1979 with
modifications as noted below):

          ZQ (1) = 0.7 i**1*
             (2) = 0.2
             (3) = 0.1
             (4) = 1.0
             (5) = 1.0
                                    49

-------
             (6)  =0.7 (*2)
             (7)  = 0.05
             (8)  = 0.00^*3)
             (9)  = 0.3
            (10)  = 0.15(*4)
Notes:
     *1.   Sheih, et al.  (1979)  recommended a value of Z0=lm for "metropolitan
          city."   In  our case  the "urban"  category includes  all  "built-up"
          lands,  including  residential,   industrial,  commercial,  and  other
          areas  characterized  by  building  heights much  lower  than  those
          characterized as metropolitan.   Our choice of 0.7 m for urban areas
          is an estimated mean value.

     *2.   The  value  for  Category 6  represents a  rough average  between  the
          values suggested.
          by Shieh, et al. for marshland and ungrazed forests.

     *3.   None  of  the cells  in the NEROS grid fall  in this category, i.e.,
          T(x,8)=0  everywhere,   and  hence the  value  assigned  to  zQ(8)  is
          immaterial.

     *4.   Category 10  is a  rough average  of cropland  and rangeland  values.
     The values  of z  computed  from  Eq.  (4-5) for each  NEROS cell should be
recorded in the PIF.
                                    50

-------
Step 3
     Compute the local  friction velocity  u*(x, tm) using
               k  u
          u* =
               G(z,L,zQ)
                                                                        (4-6)
where k =  0.4  is  the von Karman constant; z is  the  elevation  of the surface


wind observations  above ground—use
          z=10m;
                                                                   (4-7)
and G is the similarity function
G = In
               o
                    if 1/1 = 0
                                                                  (4-8a)
G = In
                MIN(5.2f,5.2)   ,  if  z  <  6L and  L > 0
         -1        -1           (M)(40+1)
G = 2(tan i | - tan i 4n) + In C/ui\/t  -1\3*  if  L < °-
                                                                       (4-8b)
                                                                       (4-8c)
The Obukhov  length L is  from (4-4), ZQ  is  the local  surface roughness from


(4-5), and
          4=
                    Z+Z
          40 = a-15-j)
                                    51

-------
Step 4
     Estimate the effective  surface  kinematic heat flux  in  each grid cell at
hour t :
where T  is the surface virtual temperature (°K) in the given cell obtained by
weighting the nearest observations T   of virtual temperature (provided by P3)
                                      _p
as  in  Step 1  above;  and  g = 9.8  ms   is the  acceleration due  to gravity.
(Note that the T   data from P3 are in degrees Celsius.)

     Table 4-1  summarizes  the input and output variables in each of the three
steps that  comprise this processor, and Figure  4-1 illustrates the processor
and its data interfaces.
                                     52

-------
               Table 4-1  Summary of input and output parameters
                          in each step of Processor P4.
Input
Variable
Q (t )
Description Source
east-west surface _n P3
Step
1
Output
Variable
Ux,t )
Description
Obukhov lengl
:h (meters).
          wind component (ms  )
          at surface weather
          station n, hour t .

          north-south surface    P3
          wind component at
          station n, hour t .

          location of surface    PIF
          weather station n

          land use fraction      PIF
          of category j in
          NEROS cell centered
          at x.
aCT(x,t ) fractional sky         PIF
          coverage, total of   ,
          all cloud types over
          cell centered at x
          at hour t .       ~
                   m
                           in NEROS cell centered at
                           x, at hour t .
                           ~           m

                iu (x,t )| w.ind speed (m/sec) in NEROS
                    ~      cell centered at x, at hour
                           t  (for use in thTs Proces-
                           sor only).
          see above
PIF
effective surface
roughness (m) of
NEROS cell centered
at x.
 u (x,t )|wind speed
       m
L(x,tm)   Obukhov length (m)
  ***
          surface roughness
          On)
Step 1   3




Step 1

Step 2
friction velocity
(m/s) in NEROS
cell centered at
x, at hour t
~
                                                                               .
                                                                             m
Tfr,(x,t ) surface virtual
 w n ^*  m  .       .     »r* — •
 vn
          temperature (°C)
          at surface weather
          station n, hour t
                           m
P3
surface,heat flux
(m °Ks"1) in NEROS
cell at x, at hour
V
                                    53

-------
               Table 4-1  Summary of input and output parameters
                          in each step of Processor P4.   (Concluded)

Input                                             Output
Variable     Description        Source    Step    Variable        Description


u*(x,t )  friction velocity      Step 3
   ~  m   (m/s) in cell  at
          x at hour tm.
          ~          m

L(x,t )   Obukhov length         Step 1
  ~  ra    (m) in cell at x
          at hour t.
                                    54

-------
 YYYY
                      TJ
                      C
                      CO

                      3
                      a.
                      c
                      l
                      
                      •*- s.
                      o *-

                      I!
                      S2 «
                      » 8
                       3
                      ® a
                      .c <—
                      U 3
                      (/) O
                      O)
                      iZ
v V V V V V
     55

-------
        .  •                         SECTION 6
                                 PROCESSOR P7

MOTION OF A VISCOUS, HYDROSTATIC FLUID OF CONSTANT DENSITY OVER IRREGULAR
TERRAIN.
     We are  concerned here with  nighttime flow  regimes,  where winds  in  the
cold  air  adjacent  to the  ground,  i.e., the  radiation  inversion layer,  are
influenced  by  buoyancy,   terrain,   warm  cities,  geostrophic  forcing  and
friction.

     We will  treat  the cold,  radiation inversion layer  as  one of  constant
density pQ whose upper surface is described by

          Hvs(x,y,z,t) = zvs(x,y,t) - z = 0                              (7-1)

The subscript "vs"  designates that this  is also  the  "virtual  surface" of the
atmosphere above.  We  adopt this point of view later in formulating processor
Pll which describes the flow field above the inversion layer at night.  Figure
7-1  illustrates  Hys  and  other  terms  that  we  shall   use  in  the  following
analyses.

     Terrain elevation  (MSL)  is represented by zt(x,y)  and  z  is the vertical
coordinate  whose  origin  is   at  sealevel.   In  keeping  with  the   level  of
simplicity adopted in formulating the regional diffusion model, we shall treat
the  cold  air  layer  as a  two-dimensional  fluid.  That  is,   the  horizontal
velocity   in    the   cold   layer  u=(u,v) is   assumed  to  be   invariant  with

                                    56

-------
respect to  z.   Keep in mind  that during nighttime hours the  cold,  inversion
layer considered  here  is by  definition Layer  1  of the regional model.   The
flow  speed  in  the atmosphere  above, the  cold layer will  be represented  by
U =(U ,V ) (see Pll);  and the density in the layer above the inversion will  be
~m   m  m
represented by p , where P-^Pg-
      Figure  7-1.   Illustration  of the  variables  used in  the  flow  model.
     The x-component of the horizontal acceleration of a (2-D) fluid parcel in
the cold layer is
          d.u
                                                                         (7-2)
where m  is  the mass of the parcel in question and Fxp, FXC> and Fxf represent
the x-components  of the pressure, Coriolis and friction  forces, respectively,
exerted on the parcel.  Consider  first the form of pressure  force.
                                     57

-------
The pressure force
     We consider  the  pressure forces  acting on  the  fluid parcel  shown  in
Figure 7-2.  Since we  assume  the flow speed  to  be uniform in z, we  take the
parcel to  be a  vertical  column of fluid extending from z.  to the top surface
zys of the cold layer and having horizontal  dimensions (Ax,Ay).

     Since the cold  fluid  and the air above  are assumed to be in hydrostatic
balance, within the cold layer we have
          3p/8z = -pQg.
(7-3)
      Figure 7-2.   Air parcel  considered in the force balance analysis.
                                    58

-------
And  since  pQ  is assumed to be  constant,  at any level 2 within the parcel the
pressure is

         .P = Pvs + P09(zvs -2)                                         (7-4)

where p    is the pressure at the top of the parcel, that is on H  .
       V o                                                       V 5
     The  total  force on  the left  face  of the parcel due  to  the hydrostatic
pressure is

                   2vs
          fXL = Ay f pdz'
                   2t
Substituting  (7-4) into  this expression  and making use  of  the  definition

          h(x,y,t) = 2vs(x,y,t) : 2t(x,y)                                (7-5)
we get
Keeping in  mind that the pressure  force  is exerted inward on  all  faces,  the
force on the right face of the parcel is

                         3p
          fXR = " (pvs + ~~^ A2vs)(h+Ah)Ay - o0gAy(h+Ah)z/2             (?.7)
                          82

     The force  exerted  by  the ground on the  parcel  is directed normal to the
lower face which  is  inclined at an  angle  6T  with the horizontal plane and it
has a magnitude equal  to the total  fluid  pressure force exerted by the fluid
on the ground, i.e. ,
                                    59

-------
          fxt = -ft sin et


              = - (P0gh + PVS)(A*2 + A2t2)35 Ay sin et                    (7-8)

              = - (Pogh + Pvs)Ay Azt


In a similar  manner we find that the  force on the top face  of the parcel is
          fxvs
On combining  (7-6)  -  (7-9) and noting that 3p  /3z = -p g we obtain the total


x-component of the pressure force on the parcel:                                     f
                                                                                     s
                                                                                     2
                                                                                     V


          Fxp = fXL + fXR * fxt + 'fxvs                                               |

              = Ay(A2vs - Azt - Ah)pvs + pmghAyAzys                     (7-10)       |


                 - P0ghAy(Ah + Azt)                                                  *
We can obtain  Ah from (7-5) whereupon we  can reduce (7-10) to the final form

(for small Ax,Ay)



                         3z
          Fxp = - (Ao)gh -^ AxAy                                       (7-11)


where


          ^ = po'pm                 .                                    (7-12)



Now the mass HI of the fluid parcel is simply

          m = poghAxAy,
                                     60

-------
hence
          i F   = - £& g   vs .                                         (7-l3a)
          m  xp     p  b  3x
By analogy the y-component of the pressure Induced acceleration is
                          3z
          1 r       AD  „   VS
            F--     9 -—
Later  (see  Eqs.  7-34  and  7-35) we  will  add force components  resulting from
synoptic scale pressure gradients.  .
The friction force
     The friction  force  on the fluid parcel is  the  result of momentum fluxes
across  the  parcel's  boundaries.   These  fluxes  are  caused  by  molecular
diffusion  and  by sub-parcel scale velocity fluctuations,  or turbulence.   For
example, at the  earth's  surface the velocity must be  zero,  and thus momentum
is drained from the fluid in much the same way as heat is removed from a fluid
at a cold,  constant temperature surface.  In the case of our flow where there
is  no   heat  transfer  into the  fluid,   the  no-slip ground  surface  acts  to
transform  the  bulk  kinetic energy  of  the moving  fluid into  internal  heat
energy.  The  fluid can  also be accelerated by  influxes  of  momentum from the
atmosphere above.

     Referring to  Figure 7-3  we note that  the  viscous force on the left face
of the parcel  is

          fvl  = Ayht                                                    (7-14)
           AL       XX
                                    61

-------
where T    is  the net flux  of  x-momentum  in the x-direction  across  the left
       ^A



face of the parcel.  The force on the right-hand  face is
          fXR =
c   *!L2
xx    ax
Ax)(h
                                     8z
Ax)Ay
                                                  ,»&*
(7-15)
         Figure  7-3.  Friction forces on a fluid parcel  of  horizontal

                     dimensions (Ax,Ay) bounded by zvs  and z^.





Continuing this analysis  for  each of  the  other faces  and assuming that the



slopes of  z.  and  z   are  small enough that  the areas  of  the bottom and top
                                   62

-------
 faces of the parcel are approximately AxAy,  we get
Fxf = -

            3l
                - AX
                       32








                       8Z\

                       W

                                              55s 5
                                              atvx 9zv
                                              _*X _X
                                                              (7-16)
In  the  limit as  Ax and Ay  become very small,  the mass m  of the parcel  is
          m = p hAxAy
and hence
            F   - - -
          m  xf     pQ
                                                             (7-17)
                      8y    h  v  zx

                                                                        (7-18)
               T          +T
                xx h 3x      yx h 8y
For  the  lateral  stress components  i   and  T   we will  adopt the  gradient
                                      yv/\       Jf ^


transfer forms
P0Txx
          P0V
                        §U


                        8x
                                                              (7-19)





                                                              (7-20)
where K    and K    are  elements of  the  eddy vicosity tensor, to be  defined
       A^\  —    y



later.  We will  treat the stress T^ on  the upper surface of the fluid as a
                                   fm1\



prescribed variable.  The surface stress T   will be given later.
                                    63

-------
     By analogy with (7-18) we have
      i  yf ~   p_ •• 3x     ay  '  h vtzy   tzy>

                 0                                                      (7-21)



              * Txy h  3x  + Tyy h  8y  •*


with


          -I T   = - K   f§H + QL]
          p   xy      xy  3y   ax-*





          p7 V = "V ay'
The stress t^J is considered to be a prescribed variable; T*  and T*  are given
            AY                                             zy      zx
by





          Tzx = " P0U*COS 9                                            (7-25a)







          Tzy s ~ P0u*s1n 6                                            (7'25b)
where  u*  is  the  friction  velocity  which  we  shall   express  in  the  form,



following Melgarejo and Deardorff (1974),




          u* = CQ(u2 + v2)%;                                             (7-26)




where C  is the surface drag coefficient and 9  is the wind  direction,
          8 = tan"1 J.                                                   (7-27)



From (7-25) - (7-27) we obtain





          p* Tzx = " CD (u2 * v2)35u                                     (7"28a)
                                     64

-------
          r Tzv = - CD (lj2 + v2)3V                                   (7"28b)
          ^    y
According to Melgarejo and Deardorff,
          Cn = k2 [(In(r^) - b)2 + a2]"1                                (7-29)
                        o
where  z   is the  local  surface  roughness,  and a and b  are  functions of h/L,
where  L is the Obukhov length. (Approximate forms for a and b are given later,
7-89.)
The Coriolis force
     The Coriolis force is given simply by
          1 Fxc = +fv                                                   (7-30)

          I Fyc = -fu                                                   (7-31)
where f is the Coriolis parameter (=2Q sin 4>, where <)> =  latitude  and fl =  earth
angular speed of rotation = 211/24 hr  ).
The momentum equations
     On combining (7-2), (7-12),  (7-18) -  (7-20),  (7-28a)  and (7-30)  we obtain
the equation governing the u component of  the  flow speed:
                                     65

-------
                                sz               2         2
          9u * ..3"  .  ,,3u _   Jte   vs   -    .x   3fcu   »   3 u
          at + "37  +  vay - -      IT + f v * Kxx   5 + Kyx
                  8Kxx  . Kxx 8zvSl au .  r8Kyx .  ^x 8zvs, 3u
                  TT  * IT -aT] Sx * c~ay  + "T "ay-3 ay
                                     VS
                       K  3z        T
                       _J2i  vs §v    zx
                        h   ay  ax " hpQ-"
     For  convenience  we will  express  the  shear stress at  z   in the  form
          p  Tzx = ~aw (UM "  u)                                         (7"33)


where a^f  is a  vertical  exchange  velocity   scale  at  z = z „ and  Uu  is the
       w                                                    vs       1*1
x-component of the "observed" flow  in the layer above z   (see processor Pll,

Stage UV).


     Substituting (7-33) into (7-32) we obtain after  rearranging terms
          §H  + r,,     xx   I^x 9zvs1 3u  .  ru   8Kyx     x   ySl 3u
          3t    LU   3x      h 3x  J 3x    LV   3y      h  3y  J 3y
                                                                       (7-34)
                 Jt* azvs av, . i  8psi
                  h   3y  3xJ   p   ax
                                    66

-------
Likewise we have
          §v + [u .   xy_ .       ys, ay + [v .      .       vs  8v
          3t   LU   ax     h    ax J ax   LV    ay.     h   ay J ay
                                                  ? 3*    VS
                                                 V      G
               r-q (£E) _JL» - fu + r a  V.. + -^ — + K
                    Prt   9y         h  w  M    3x  ay    xy
                       h   3x  3yJ   p  3y

In Eqs.  (7-34)  and (7-35) the last terms on the right-hand side represent the
accelerations  caused by  synoptic  scale  pressure  gradients  in  the  boundary
layer, and p , is the sea-level pressure.
     Next we derive an equation for the virtual surface elevation z   (x,y,t).
The fluid depth equation
     Let Q be a point on the virtual surface (cf 7-1)

          Hvs(x,y,z,t) = zvs(x,y,t) - z = 0                             (7-36)

and let  its  coordinates at time tQ be (XQ, yQ, ZQ).  If the surface is moving
with a velocity vys = (uys, vvs>  wys)  at the point Q, then at the later time
t^ + At Q will have the coordinates
 o
          (xr yr zx) = (x0 + uvsAt, yo -H vvsAt, ZQ -H wysAt).         (7-37)
                                    67

-------
Since by definition Q lies  on the surface HVS at all times we must have
          H(       = 2(x'       " z  = °                           (7'38)
                        vso'          o
         ' Hvs(xl* VAt)  * 2vs(xl>yi>VAt) 'zl = °                      (7"39)
     If At is sufficiently small we can write
                           S 2vsCxo'VV +   T (xl ' V
                           (yry0) +      At
                      ay     -1  °    at
where all derivatives are evaluated  at  (XQ, y  , tfl).  Substituting (7-40) into
(7-39), subtracting (7-38) from (7-39),  and making  use of (7-37) we get
                   vs         VS          VS
          -IT = IT "vs + -af  V * -5T  - wvs
and upon taking the limit At*0 we obtain
     The unit, outward normal  vector to  the surface H    at Q  is
            -—l2Hu«                                                 (7-43)
where V is applied at Q.   Let As denote the area of the  projection  on  H    of a
horizontal rectangle  (Ax,Ay) centered at  the coordinates  (*0,y0)  °f Q  (see
Figure 7-4).   It is evident from the figure that for sufficiently small Ax and
Ay, the area As is
                                    68

-------
         As *
                                    ayj
                                                                       (7-44)
            Figure 7-4.   Projection of the horizontal  rectangle  (Ax,Ay)

                         onto the surface H   centered at point  Q.
If the slope of z   is small, say
          az
           —
           3x
                     vs
                         «i
                                                                        (7-45)
then (7-44) can be approximated by




                      3z   2    3z   2     ,

          As ~ AxAy [(-a~)  + C-sr5)  + 1]  .  if 7-45 holds.
                                                                        (7-46)
     Let vf  be the  velocity  of the  fluid at the  point Q on Hvg.   Then  the



normal downward component  of  the fluid velocity relative to HVS  at point Q is
            = ' (Jtf - vus) • n
                   fv  «VH   - v-'VH  ]
                   iu~vs ~ vs   ~f ~ vsj
                                                                        (7-47)
                                    69

-------
     Making use of (7-42) we can write (7-47)  in the equivalent form

          "HOT?          .                         ..            <™>
where

          J* = _§. + w  .n                                              c,
          Ht ~ At   «!*•? ~                                              *
          ui»  a u   »»| <«r

     The  total   downward volume  flux of  fluid  crossing As  is vAs.   Using
(7-46), (7-48) and

                  32... 2    8z   2
we have
                     dHvs
          vAs = AxAy -                                                 (7-51)
Thus, the net downward  flux or fluid per unit horizontal  area  is

          n   «^S                                                  (7-52)
          nvs   ^JT                                                  c/ b^J
or
where (u,  v,  w) is  the  fluid velocity on H
                       -~T-~ - —              V5
     An  expression  for   n,    can  be  derived   from  the  first  law  of
thermodynamics.   Assuming  that  all  sources and  sinks of  heat are  on the
boundaries of the fluid, e.g.,  radiative cooling on  H   and heat transfer to
the terrain surface  Ht,  we  can write the first law in the form
                                   70

-------
          d6 _ 86 .  ,86 .   86 ,   86 _
          dt - 8t * "Bt * V8y + "§! *
where 6 is the potential temperature defined as
                                                          (7-54)
          e = T(-
                P
                P R/CD
                     P
                                                          (7-55)
where  P  is a  reference pressure  (usually  1000 mb) and p  is  local  pressure.
Following  the  procedure described  in  Part 1,  Section 2  for  obtaining layer
averaged variables, we get from (7-54)
                                                dH,
                                    vs
                                                                        (7-56)
                                                  vs
       WH.
       ~ ~ t
                                            — vs
                                                      = 0
         t                                                  vs
where T~J denotes averaging over the terrain surface H., T~7 denotes averaging
over the virtual surface H  ,
and
          n(x,y,t) = zvs(x,y,t) - zt(x,y)
5 H f f <*2da
                                                          (7-57)
                                                                        (7-58)
and A is the area of a grid cell in the model
     Look at  the first term in brackets  in  (7-56).   In  analogy with  (7-52) we
have
          dH,
                                                                         (7-59)
                                     71

-------
where nt is the downward fluid  volume  flux at the ground.  Thus,
          	t
           di-L
                = -^                                                (7'60)
where w'9'   is the kinematic heat flux  at  the  ground.


     Consider now  the  second term  in  brackets in  (7-56).   Since 8zt/3t = 0

          __t
and since Ht  =  0 (there is no net  flux of air through the terrain), we have


             t
                     t
                      = o.                                               (7-61)


     The  third  term  in brackets  in  (7-56)  can  be written with  the aid of

(7-52) as

               vs
                        vs
and the fourth term becomes, using (7-52) and (7-53),


                    vs             32
                                                                        (7-63)
where  n    and 2    are taken to  be averages  over  an area  A of  a  grid cell

surrounding any given point.
     Substituting  (7-60) -  (7-63)  into  (7-56) and  collecting terms  we  get



       - d        ,   _^    	vs
          ~ <0> + i r-w'61  - 6n    + <6>n  ] = 0                      (7-64)
          at       h       o     vs        vs
where

          d,
                                                                        (7-65)
                                    72

-------
     Following Zeman  (1979)  we shall  assume that within the cold fluid, i.e.,
 -r.e  nighttime  stable boundary  layer,  the potential temperature  has  a linear
 ariation with height, namely

          e = eh - (eh - e0)(i - ^)                                  (7-66)

 /here 8.  is the  value  of 9 at the  elevation  h above  ground and 9  is  the
 potential temperature at  the surface.   At elevation h  the turbulent  heat and
 Tiomentum fluxes are  negligibly small; so if we  take  this to be the elevation
 of the virtual surface z  , then the kinematic heat flux on H   is simply that
 due to the motion of the surface itself.  In this case we have
              vs
                                        if%s>0
Also, on integrating (7-66) in the manner of (7-58) we get
          <9> = h (9h + 9Q)                                             (7-68)
and hence
          d,,         du        du
           n ^rt^ _i_nA.inrt                                     r-
          dt       ^ dt wh   ^ dt  o*

     Substituting (7-67) and (7-68) into (7-64) we obtain
          "«   Veodt       9h-8o
Making use of (7-69) in this equation we obtain

          Hvs = B(he-h)                                                  (7-71)
where
                      d
                             + V                                      (7'72a)
                                     73

-------
                 2wTern
          h  = - - £-                                          .    (7-72b)

     It is  instructive  to compare (7-71) -  (7-72)  with models of the  stable
boundary  layer  developed  by  others.   Earlier efforts  have considered  only
homogeneous surfaces with  no mean  vertical  motion (w=0).   In this  case  (7-71)
reduces to (see 7-53 and 7-57)
          f£ = B(he - h).                                                (7-73)
and d^/dt •»• 8/3t.   Nieuwstadt  and Tennekes (1981)  (NT) recently proposed
             = B'(h-h)                                                  (7-74)
where
                  • /•*  o^
          pi - _  4/3  _ 0
             ~      ®  3t
          ne - c4 resin  cosa                                         (?.75b)
where f  is  the Coriolis parameter, G is  the geos trophic wind speed, a is the
angle between the geos trophic  and the  surface  winds,  and  c. is  a constant
whose value is estimated by  Nieuwstadt and Tennekes to  be  about 0.15.   Good
agreement was  found  between the predictions of this model and observations of
the boundary layer depth h.

     On  comparing (7-71j - (7-72) with the NT model (7-74)  - (7-75) we find
that except for the constant 4/3 in B1, the two models  are the same, provided
                                    74

-------
that the surface heat flux satisfies

           jSrgr j s CUL5 fG2sina cosa^                                   (?.76)

     To determine whether this is a plausible relationship, we note first that
for large values of h/L, where L is the Obukhov length
          L = - — y*  -                                               (7-77)
                gk vT^e
Brost and Wyngaard (1978) found

          G2sinacosa = u£ ()2 (^)                                     (7-78)
where k = 0.4 in the von Kartnan constant.  Substituting (7-77) and (7-78) into
(7-76) we find that (7-76) implies
          h = 0.8 (O                                                 (7-79)

But this is just the formula that Zilitinkevich (1972) derived for h from
                                        u I  i,
similarity theory [in particular h = c5(-4=) ]; and thus we conclude that
(7-76) is a plausible expression, at least for large h/L.
     Having an  expression now  for  n.  ,  let us return  to  (7-53) and consider
the vertical velocity  w.   Since the cold layer  is shallow we can approximate
the continuity equation by
Integrating from z. to z   and using the assumption that u and v are invariant
                  t     VS
with respect to z, we get
                                    75

-------
          "C+• "t - "„•        '
     Since there  is no flux F of fluid through the ground, we see from (7-61)
that
          az.     azt    BZ+
          5T + "5F * »5T - wt ' °                                    (7'82)
Solving (7-82) for w. and using the result in (7-81) we obtain

          »«• 4r+ v§r - hC§J+1]                                (7'83)
where h is given  by (7-57).  Substituting (7-83) into (7-53) we obtain finally
          §£ + ,lll * »?Jl j. Kr9." j. 9Yi = «                              (7-84a)
          at
where
          h = zvs - zt                                                (7-84b)
This is the model equation that we shall  use  to  obtain zys.
Simplified model equations
     Going back to the momentum equations  (7-34)  and  (7-35)  and  recalling that
z   is the elevation where vertical  heat and momentum fluxes due to  turbulence
are negligible, we assume that
          o^s~ 0.                                                       (7-85)

Let  us also  assume  in this  "first  generation" model  that the lateral  eddy

                                    76

-------
 .iscosity  tensor  K is  also zero.  With  these assumptions  (7-34)  and (7-35)
 -educe to
                             2   /,  rt !          3z
          at '  "ax -ay H H CD (u +v >* = '* pn ~*T
                            1 3psl
                           pj IT * fv                                  (7-86)
          9v * ,^v  . W8v .  v r2 ,2 .  ,,2^ _   „ Ap 3z
          at + "a* * Va7 + H CD (u  + v }  "g'S
                         "aPsi
                        : -*~- - f"                                      (7-87)
where p  ,  is  the sea-level pressure and h  and z   are given by (7-84), which
       91                                        V o
we rewrite here for completeness: .
               h = zvs - ZT.                                           (7-88b)
The set  of  equations (7-86) - (7-88) is a closed system that we can solve for
u, v,  and h given CQ, Ap,  p  ,  p , ,  Zj and nvs-  Earlier we described how n
is related  to the surface  heat flux w'9' and  the  temperature distribution 6
within the  cold  layer (see 7-71 and 7-72); and we presented formulas that one
might  use to  derive  these variables (see  7-66  and  7-76).   Below we summarize
the  expressions  that we  propose to  use for these and the  other parameters
listed above in the first generation version of processor P7.
                                    77

-------
(1)  n   - Eq-  7-71,72 with 6.  and 6   from  surface  and upper air mete-
           orological  data (Processors PI and P3); w'6'  = Q = kinematic
           heat flux at the  ground  (from Processor P4);
(2)  Zy(x,y) = 30 x 45  min (lat-lon)  smoothed  terrain heights (meters,
               MSL,  from P7)

(3)  Cn = k{[ln(-£)  -b]2 + a2}"35                                 (7-89a)
                2o
     where k = 0.4 is the von Karman constant;  h  is the  local
     solution of Eq.  (7-88);  ZQ is  the surface  roughness (m), from
     P4;
                  f5, if L>0,
                  /_-!, otherwise;
a
                                                   (7-89b)
                 •T
                  (.4,
        If L>0,
                                                   (7-89c)
        'otherwise;
     and  L  is the  Obukhov  length (from  P4).   Note that  L,  ZQ,  h,  and
     hence a,  b,  and  CQ  are defined  for each grid  point in  the model
     domain.    (Eq.   89  is  based  on  values  given  by  Melgarejo  and
     Deardorff, 1974.)
(4)
     where 6k and 9  are from Processors PI and P3;
            ho
(5)  pQ =                                                         (7-90b)
     where  pgl  is the  sea-level  pressure  (from P3); Ty  is the virtual
     temperature (from P3); and R is the gas constant.
                               78

-------
                                      _
(6)  g and  f are  gravity  (9.8 m  sec  )  and the  Coriolis parameter  (=
     2Qsin<|0, respectively.   H
     local  latitude in radians.
          2Qsin<|0,  respectively.   Here Q  = 2n/(24-60'60) sec"   and   is the
 .ater  we  outline the  stages of  calculations  that are  needed  to compute the
 parameters  listed  above and  the additional  quantities, not  used in the flow
                                                                                         i
 .simulation, that P7  must provide to the model  and to other processors in the           j
 network.                                                                                 \
Solution of the u, v, and z   equations
     Each  of   the   Eqs.   (7-86)  -  (7-88),  which  govern  u,  v  and  zvs>
respectively, has the form
                     i/|y + br = 5                                       u~si;           t
                                                                                         !
                                                                                         ii
where U and V are functions of r.  We will approach the task of solving (7-91)
numerically using the technique developed in Section 9 of Part 1.  That is, we
assume that  within each small  time  interval  At, the coefficients  U and V in
(7-91) can  be treated  as  independent  variables whose values  are  determined
using the value  of F at the  beginning  of the interval, t  say.  In this case
the solution of (7-91) can be expressed in the closed form

          F(x,t0+At) =Jp(x,t0+At|x',t0)F(x;t0)dx'
                                                                        (7-92)
                   VAt
                     p(x,t+At|x;t')S(x',t')dt'dx
                                    79

-------
where p is the Green's function of (7-91).   In the present instance it has the
form
          P(x,y,tjxlyit0) = 6[x-(xlfx)]5[y-Cyl+y)]e~b(t~to)             (7'93)
where 6[x] is the delta function and
                              t
          x = x(t|x',y',t0) =  U[x'  + x(t'), y'  + y(t'),t']dt'          (7-94a)
            = y(tjx',y',t0) =  Vfx1  +x(t'),y'  + y(t'),t' ]df .         (7-94b)
     The assumptions that  U and V are approximately  constant  during the time
step At should be valid provided that At is small enough to satisfy

          if]  TT At <
-------
          F-
 exceeds  unity,  flow discontinuities  such as hydraulic  jumps  will  occur, and
 these  will  cause  considerable problems  in the  numerical  model.   We  do not
 expect  the  nighttime  flows  that  we  will  simulate  to  become  supercritical
 often.   When  it  happens,  it will  occur in isolated  portions  of  the model
 region  and we  will  be  able  to  anticipate  it by  monitoring  the  temporal
 behavior of the flow.   In those grid  cells where we predict that the flow is
 about to become supercritical,  we propose to prevent  it by applying enhanced
 eddy viscosity.

     A  detailed description  of  the  numerical  scheme  used to solve  the flow
 model equations, specifically equations reducible to the form (7-91), is given
 in  Appendix  A  of  this  section.   The  scheme  described  there  is the  same one
                                t
 that  is  used  to solve  the transport and diffusion  component  of  the regional
pollution model  equations.   The  scheme is an  explicit,  5th  order  space, 1st
order time algorithm that permits the model domain to be treated in piece wise
fashion.  This  is  a particularly valuable feature in models such as ours that
are too large to load entirely into the computer memory.

     One of the principal  problems associated  with  the  numerical  solution of
equations  like  (7-86)  -  (7-88)  is  the  treatment of  the  lateral  boundary
conditions.    Since  no  generally  valid  method  exists  for specifying the
boundary values required  by  the difference  equations,  a  common  practice in
mesoscale flow  models  is  to place  the boundaries far  from  the  edges of the
 spatial  domain  of  interest.   Another approach  is to  imbed the  flow  model
within  another  one  of coarser  resolution  which  provides  boundary  values.
                                    81

-------
Neither of these methods  of  circumventing the boundary problem can be used in
our studies because the  additional  computer storage and time  that they would
require would  make the overall'simulation  effort  impractical.   Consequently,
we have formulated  an  approximation of the boundary conditions,  described in
Appendix  B of this  section,  that  is sufficient  for  treating the  limited
periods of concern to us in modeling the nighttime boundary layer flow.

                                                       •
     Below we  outline the various  stages  of  computation  that  are  necessary
within processor P7.
Stage ZT
     The  "raw"  topography data available  in  the PIF will be  denoted  here by
zt(\,).   These represent  terrain elevations  averaged  over  5  min x  5  min
latitude - longitude sectors.  The regional model and the flow model developed
in this  section require the elevation  zt(A,<|>)  averaged over 30  min x 45  min
latitude - longitude sectors.

     Let zt(I,J) denote  the value of the 30 x 45 min smoothed terrain at grid
point (I,J) (column I, row J) of the NEROS region.  Then

                             zt(i,j)                                     (7-97)
                            ) L
where the summation is over the 54, 5 min x 5 min cells surrounding grid point
(I,J)  (see figure 7-5).   Note that  the 54  cell  smoothing area used  in  the
definition of zt(I,J) overlaps the smoothing areas associated with the 8 NEROS
grid points nearest the point (I,J).
                                    82

-------
     The input and output requirements of Stage ZT are summarized in Table 7-1
 later in this section.















®..

®_

















	 1


(I.J)


















®_.
M.J+1
®,
'
(1+1. J)










           Figure 7-5 .   Illustration of the 54 5 min x 5 min cells
                        that are used in the calculation of zt(I,J).
Stage DELRO
     The parameter Ap, is used in this and other processors as an indicator of
the presence  of an inversion layer  at the ground.   This parameter will  be a
scalar and a  function of time only  in  the first generation model.   We define
                       1, if surface inversion is present
          Ap,(t ) = )     over most of the model region                (7-98)
            1  n    *     at time tn;
                       .0,  otherwise.
Under this definition  the  magnitude of
                                             is  an  indicator of the density of
                                    83

-------
air in Layer 1 relative to that in Layer 2.   In the first  generation model we
will compute Ap-,(t  ) using the following procedure.
where
          (1)  Define
              5Pl(tn) =
+1, if Ap
-1, if Ap^t
 0, otherwise
                                     ) = 0 and Q(tn)  <  0;
                   = 1 and TDEF(tn) <0;
          H(tn)-nQCi,J,tn>
(7-99)
is the surface kinematic  heat flux (°Kmsec  ) summed over all  grid points (i,j)
of the model  domain,  and  TOEF is the mean "temperature deficit"  of the cold layer
which we approximate  by
     2
     max
                                         m
                                                                      (7-100)
In this expression hmav  is the depth of the cold layer at the time the  surface
                    UlClA                        '
heat flux reverses,  i.e.,
                            h(i,j,tm), if Q(i,j,tra) > 0
                                                      < 0;
                                                  (7-101)
                           0, otherwise
The value assigned to  h    before the surface heat flux reversal, in this case
                      max
0, is immaterial  since the value is never used.  In (7*100), the variable q is
given by
•{
Q(U,tm), if Q(i,j,tm) > 0;
0, otherwise
                                                                      (7-102)
                                   84

-------
The  constant a  that appears  in  (7-100)  is a  temperature gradient  that  we
Define in Stage ETA.

     (2) With 6p}(tn) determined by (7-99) a functional form for Ap1(tfl) that
 s consistent with (7-98) is the following:

          Apl(tn) = Apl(tn-l) + 6pl(V                               (7-103a)
v/ith initial value
          Ap1(tQ) = 0                                                 (7-103b)
and
          t0 = 1200 EST.                                              (7-lOSc)
Under  definition  (7-103) we  assume in effect  that an  inversion layer forms
over the  entire model domain  at the hour the average  surface  heat  flux over
the whole domain becomes negative; and it disappears everywhere at the hour t
that TDEF,  defined  by  (7-100),  first becomes  negative.   This  is  clearly a
crude approximation  in  a model such as ours which spans 15° of longitude, but
to relax  it would require  an  escalation  in the complexity  of  the flow field
description that would put the overall modeling effort beyond the scope of the
"first generation" effort.

     In summary,  stage  DELRO computes  the  single scalar  variable Ap,(tn),
n=0,...N  using  Eqs.  (7-99)   -  (7-103).    This variable  is used throughout
processor P7 as  an  indication of when specific functions are to be performed,
and it  is  an output of P7 that guides the use of the fields generated here in
other processors in the model  network.  A  list of all the input and outputs of
this stage is given later in Table 7-1.

                                    85

-------
Stage ETA
     This stage operates only during those time steps t  when Ap,(t )=1 and it
operates  in  unison  with  Stage .FLOMQD,  described  below,  which solves  the
equation set (7-86) - (7-88).  In this stage we compute nvs. using Eqs. (7-71)
and  (7-72),  and  Ap/pQ, using  (7-90a).    Both  of these  calculations  require
values  of the  temperature  6.  at  the  top  of the  cold layer.   Rather than
attempt to estimate these from upper air data, which would be a difficult task
given the shallow depth of the cold  layer and the limited  frequency of the
upper air measurements, we  propose instead to estimate  8h  from the observed
ground-level temperatures 6  assuming a constant temperature lapse                    f
                                                                                      1
          Q/3
          |f = or                                                       (7-104)

in the cold layer.  The observations reported by Godowitch and Ching (1980) of
the nighttime surface  inversion in rural areas around St. Louis indicate that
a typical value is
          a - 1.2 °C/100m.                                              (7-105)
Using (7-104) we have
          6h = eo * ffh                                                 (7-106)
with cr given by (7-105); and hence  from (7-90a)

                    o         o
We will estimate the surface temperature 6   at each  grid point  (I,J)  using the
virtual temperature  observations T  , n=l,...N made at the N  surface weatl-.sr
stations.  We assume here that the  T  (°C)  are available from Processor  P3 for
each hour.  In this case 9  (I,J,t ) is computed as  follows:
                                    86

-------
                                                                       (7-108)
                          n=l

where
          rn        -                                                  <7-109)
is  the distance  between grid  cell  (I,J)  and  the site  (x ,y )  of  surface
station n.   Equation (7-108)  should  be evaluated  at  each time  step  tm that
     The  inversion  layer growth  rate parameter nvs can  now  be  computed from
(7-71)  and (7-72)  for  each  grid  cell  and  time  step.   Since  the  physical
assumptions on which  the governing equations (7-86) - (7-88) are based do not
hold in situations  where the fluid is being  heated from below, we must limit
the minimum value  of  rj   to zero.  The  net effect of this  is  to assume that
over warm  cities at night,  the surface heat flux is never positive.  Thus, we
have
          nvs(I,J,tm) = max {0, B[he - h(I,J,tffl)]}                     (7-110)
where
                                    87

-------
and
                2Q(I,J,tJ
In these expressions we can use the approximations
                           t
                                                                       (7
          8h    	
          3t  z          At

where 8Q  is given  by (7-108) and h  is  the solution of Eq. 7-88  provided  by
Stage FLOMOD.

     Note in (7-lllb) that we use estimates of the surface heat flux Q in each
cell  rather  than the  expression  (7-76)  discussed earlier  in  the  estimate  of
hg.   The  latter is based  on the  assumption of homogeneous, flat  terrain and
homogeneous  heat flux  and  hence  estimates  of  w'6 '   derived from  it using
observations of  the  ageostrophic  wind angle or acquired from wind observations
would probably be erroneous.

     In summary.  Stage ETA  provides  values of Ap/pQ  (using  (7-107)) at each
grid point and time step that Ap^ = 1; values of nvs at the same locations and
times using  (7-110);  and the surface temperature 6Q at all hours.  A  list of
the input and output parameters of this Stage is provided in Table 7-1.

-------
Stage PCD
     This  stage computes  the pressure  and drag  coefficient terms  that are
required in the momentum  equations (7-86) and (7-87).   Therefore,  this stage
operates only at times t  when Ap,(t ) = 1-

     We assume  that  the sea-level  pressure data p ,   measured at each of the
                                                  5 i y n
n=l,2,...N surface  weather stations  is  available for  each hour  t  that PCD
operates.   At  each  of  these  hours  sea-level   pressure  values  should  be
interpolated  at  each  grid  point  in  the  model  domain  using the  following
formula:

                          n=l "
where
          rn =  [(IAX - xn)2 + (JAy - yj2]*                           (7-115)
and N is the number of surface stations at which sea-level pressure values are
available.   Using the  same  interpolation  formula,  derive estimates  of the
surface air density at each grid point at hour t :
                        N
                       n=l
where r   is  given by (7-115) and pn is the density at surface station n  (from
P3).
                                    89

-------
     At each grid point we require values of the functions
                . 3p .
          Px .5! -jfl                                                (7-117.)
          "y ' p  -                                                   (

We will approximate  the  spatial  derivatives that appear  in  (7-117)  using the
fourth-order finite  difference scheme  discussed in the appendix to Section 8.
With those expressions we get
          Px (I'J'tm) =
                      - Psl(I-l,J,tm)] - l/12[psl(H-2,J,tm)            (7-118)
                  .) « A[p0(I,J,tm)]"1{2/3[Psl(I,J-H,tm)
                     - Psl(I,J-l,tra)] - l/12[psl(I,J+2,tm)             (7-119)
where Ax and  Ay are the x and  y separation distances (m)  of  the grid points
nearest (I,J);  and  A = 100 is the conversion factor required to transform the
                                                          -1   -2
sea-level pressure  values  from  units of millibars to kg m  sec  .  (Note that
PQ  has  units of  kg m   and  Ax and  Ay have units  of  meters.)  The gridded
functions P   and  P   are outputs of  Stage  PCD each hour that Ap, = 1; and the
           x      y                                             j.
sea-level pressure p , given by (7-114) is an output for all hours.

     The computation of the  drag  coefficient value Cg  in  each grid cell and
hour   requires  a  straightforward  implementation of  Eq.   (7-89).    We have
                                    90

-------
                              h(I,J,t )    j   2 -Sj
                      =k{[ln (         )-b]Z +a2} '                    (7-120)
  iere k=0.4; z  is the surface roughness (m) of cell (I,J); h is the depth (m)
  f the surface inversion layer in (I,J) at t  (from Stage FLOMOD); and
                5, if L(I,J,t ) > 0;
          a = i              m
                -1, otherwise
               -5, if L(I,J,t ) > 0;
          b =<{               m
                4, otherwise.
Here  L  is the  Obukhov  length  (m)  in cell  (I,J)  at hour t   (from  P4).   The
coefficient CD(I,J,tm)  is  the third and final output of Stage PCD.   (Refer to
Table 7-1 for a summary of the inputs and outputs of this Stage.)
Stage IBC
     This stage computes boundary and initial values of u, v, and h for use in
solving the system  of equations (7-86) -  (7-88).   For this purpose we assume
that initially and  along the boundaries of the simulation region the velocity
field is in equilibrium with the friction, pressure and Coriolis forces.  That
is, we assume (cf 7-86, 87)
           2_2
          ^-j-	  = ~PX + fs (sine)                                  (7-121)
                  9
                    = -p  - fS (cos6)                                  (7-122)

                                    91

-------
where  s =  (u2  + v2)^  is the  flow  speed and  6 is its  direction.   Cross-
multiplying (7-121) by (7-122) we get

          P  sine -. P  cose = fs                                       (7-123)
           x         y
and  on squaring  (7-121)  and (7-122),  adding  the results  and jnaking  use of
(7-123) we obtain

          s4C 4
          -^-8- + f2s2 - (Pv2 + P 2) = 0.                              (7-124)
            h^             x     y

Since all parameters except s in (7-124) are known, we can solve this equation
for the  flow  speed s at each grid  point and then substitute the results into
(7-123) to obtain the corresponding flow directions e.

     Next, we define the time t«g:

          t«Q = time during a given 24-hour period when
                Ap  changes from 0 to 1.                                (7-125)
This marks  the initial instant at which  the equations (7-86) -  (7-88) apply,
and it  is  the function of Stage  IBC to provide the necessary values  of  u,  v,
and h at this  time.  Thus,

          if t = t^Q, Stage IBC  computes  initial  values  as  follows:

                   h(i,j,tK£)) = h0 » 30m,                               (7-126)
                   u(i,j,tKO) = s(i,j,tKO)cose(i,j,tKO)                 (7-127)

                   v(i,j,tKO) = s(i,j,tKO)sine(i,j,tKO)                 (7-128)
                                     92

-------
 here  s(i,j,tKO)  is  the  solution  of (7-124)  at  grid point  (i,j)  based on
 alues of  PX,  P  ,  CQ and  h (from 7-126) at  that point; and 6(i,j,tKO)  is the
 :orresponding solution of  Eq.  (7-123).
          if t™ > ti/n and Ap-,(t,) = 1,  Stage IBC  computes
              m _ t\u       j.  in
                      boundary values  of u,  v,  and  h  as  follows:

                   flBC^'J*V = %s(1,J.tB)                          (7-129)

                   flBC<1'J'V = S£ tu(i>J,tm)  -  ud.j.t^)]          (7-130)

                   *Bc(1,»J'V = & Cv(i>J''V  '  v(1>J>Vi)]-         (7-131>
In  these equations  (i,j)  are boundary points only.   Also, nvs  is  given by
Stage  ETA  and u  and v are  computed  on the boundaries using the same method
employed to obtain  the initial  conditions, (7-127) and  (7-128) above.  We
should  point  out that  in  our  treatment   of  the  boundary  conditions   (see
Appendix B  to this  chapter),  we give  the  values  of  u,  v, and  h  at inflow
boundary points  in terms  of their initial  values,  i.e., h(i,j,tKQ)  etc.,  and
we  require  that  the  subsequent  time  derivatives of  these  variables be
specified,  namely

          H, U, and V.

     Stage- IBC provides the boundary conditions (7-129) -  (7-131)  at  each time
step t  that Ap1  =  1.  The  input and  output  parameters  for this  stage  are
summarized in Table 7-1.
                                    93

-------
Stage H1HO
     This  stage  performs  the  final   operations  in  the calculation  of  the
elevation z,,  of  the top  surface  of  Layer  1 of the regional  model; and  it
converts  this  and other  surface  elevations  into pressure  coordinates.    The
specific operations are  defined below.
          h1(i,j,tm)=
                         h(i,j,t ),  if Ap,(t )  = 1;
                                m        i  m                          (7-132)

                        .max{100, min{500,  L(i,j,tm)   }},

                              if Ap^tJ - 0.
Here h  is  the solution of (7-88), as  provided by  stage FLOMOD, and L  is  the
Obukhov length, used earlier.   The value assigned h,  by Eq.  (7-132) when Ap,  =
0  is  constrained  to  prevent  the  Layer  1  depth  from  approaching  zero
thickness  —  which could  happen in extremely unstable conditions when  L  •*
0 — and also to prevent Layer  1 from becoming as deep as the mixed layer —
which  would  force  the  thickness  of  Layer  2  to  zero.   Although  these
constraints  are  not   necessary  in  principle,  they  are  applied to  prevent
numerical problems  in  the code which might arise as cell thicknesses approach
arbitrarily small values.

     The virtual surface elevation zys is computed as follows:

                           z-rd.j) + h^(i,j,tm), if Ap, (tm) = 1;


Since Zy is given in meters above sea-level, the values of  z^ and  zys obtained
from (7-132) and (7-133) are also in units of  m  (MSL).
                                    94

-------
     Several  other processors  require  the  surface  elevations  in pressure
coordinates.  These are computed as  follows:
                                       z-,(i,j,t  )g                    ...
         •Pl^'J'V = Psl(1.J,tn)exp[-i	—]                    (7-134)
                                       RdT(1,J,V
where g = 9.8m sec" ,  Rd = 287m  sec"2 °K  ,  Z-^  = ZT + hp  and

          T(1,j,tB) = %[2eo(i,j,tB)  + 0.0065zt(i,j)]                   (7-135)

In this expression 0.0065 °K m   is  the temperature lapse  rate of the Standard
Atmosphere  which,  for altitude calculation purposes,  we assume holds between
ground elevation and sea-level.
     Similarly

          Pvs(i,j,tm) = Eq.  (7rl34) with z1 replaced  by zys             (7-136)

     Finally, in accordance with  the  analyses presented in  Appendix  B  of  Part
1 of this report, we shall prescribe the depth h  of  Layer 0 to  be
          h0(i,j,tm) = h^i.j.y/lO.                                   (7-137)
The inputs and outputs of Stage H1HO are summarized in Table 7-1.
Stage SIG
     This stage estimates the fractions a™ and QJQ of surfaces 2i(x>y.tm)  ancl
[Zy(x,y) + h0(x,y,tm)] that are penetrated by terrain.

     Referring  to  Fig.  7-5  which  illustrates the process of  computing  Zj in
Stage ZT, we define

                                    95

-------
          ov,(I,J,t )  = 4 £*0',j,t  )                                 (7-138)
           11      m    54 1,jeD(IfJ)n ,

where X is defined as
                       f l,if zf(i,j)  > z,(I,J,tm);                     (7-139)
          A / ^ * ^ \ —           ^         ™      "*
          &\ • »J j » y "   '
                 m     (_ 0, otherwise

and the  summation in  (7-138)  is  over all  54 of the  5  min x 5 min  subcells
contained within the 3 x 3 grid cell area in which Zj (I,J)  is  defined.

     For simplicity in this first  generation model we will  assume


where  a^ is  given  by  (7-138).   The  inputs  and  outputs  of Stage SIG  are
summarized in Table. 7-1.
Stage FLOMOD
     This  stage solves  the system  of  equations  (7-86)  - (7-88)  using the
numerical  method  discussed  earlier,  beginning  on  page  79.    A  detailed
description of  the  numerical  procedures used to solve  the equations is given
in the appendices to this chapter; and the input and output parameters of this
stage are summarized in Table 7-1.

     A schematic view  of the interrelationships among the various stages that
comprise Processor 97 is given in Figure 7-6, page 130.
                                    96

-------
  Table 7-1.   Summary of the input and output requirements
              of each stage of Processor P7.
 Input
Variable
  Description
                      Source    Stage
                                                       Output
                                                      Variable
  Description
surface kinematic ,,
heat flux (°K m s"i;
at grid cell (i,j)
at hour t
                        P4      DELRO    Ap,(t )
                                           L
                                                                    surface  inversion
                                                                    indicator:  =  1  if
                                                                    an  inversion  is
                                                                    present  over  the
                                                                    entire model  domain
                                                                    at  hour  t ; = 0
                                                                    otherwise.
depth of cold layer     Stage
(m) at grid point       FLOMOD
(i,j) at hour t
5 min x 5 min
smoothed terrain
elevation (m MSL)
centered at longitude
A, latitude 
-------
                                   Table 7-1. (Continued)
 Input
Variable
              Description
                                         Output
                      Source   Stage  .  Variable
  Description
h(I,J,tm)
            depth (meter) of
            cold surface layer
            in cell (I,J) at
            hour m.
                       Stage    PCD     Cn(I,J,t )
                       FLOMOD   (cont.)   u      m
drag coefficient
(dimensionless)
in cell (I,J) at
hour m.
z0(I,J)
L(I,J,tB)
surface roughness
(m) in cell (I,J)
Obukhov length (m)
in cell (I,J) at
hour m.
P4
P4
p , (i,j,t ) sea-level pressure ii
cell (i,j) at hour t
•yUlJ.«.BJ
horizontal  pressure     Stage   IBC
force term (see 7-118)  PCD
horizontal pressure     Stage
force term (see 7-119).  PCD
                                                     h(i,j,tKQ)
                                                                   initial depth (m)
                                                                   of the cold layer in
                                                                   cell (i,j)
initial east-west
flow speed (m sec
component in cell
                                                                                    _l
CD(i,j,tm)   drag coefficient
 .-.-O'j.t )  cold layer growth
 vs      m   rate (m/sec)
                                    Stage
                                    PCD
                                    Stage
                                    ETA
                                         v(i,j,tKQ)
                                                  m
                                                            lf V
                                                      W'-J>V
initial north-south
flow speed component
in cell (i,j)

time derivative  (m/sec
of cold layer depth
at boundary cell
(i,j)  at  time tffl

time derivative  of
the east-west flow
component on the
boundary  at time t
                  m

time derivative  of
the north-south  flow
component at boundary
point  «(i,j) (units:
m sec   )
Zj(isj)      elevation (m, MSL)
             of smoothed terrain
             in grid cell (i,j)
                                     Stage   H1HO
                                     ZT
                                         h-i(i»j»t )    thickness (m) of
                                          1      m     Layer 1 in cell (i,j)
                                                       at time t.
                                                                             m
                                        98

-------
                                    Table  7-1.  (Continued)
 Input
Variable
               Description
                                   Source   Stage
                   Output
                  Variable
   Description
hcu.y
             depth (m)  of  cold
             surface layer
 sl
         m
L(i,j,tm)    Obukhov length  (m)

Pci(1»J»tm)  sea-level  pressure
             (mb) in cell  (i,j)
             at hour t
                     m

             surface temperature
             (°K) in cell  (i,j),
             hour t
                   m
                                     Stage    H1HO     zu,(i,j,tm)
                                     FLOMOD   (cont.)   V5      m
P4

Stage
PCD
                                     Stage
                                     ETA
elevation (m, MSL)
of virtual surface
in cell (i,j), hour

V

elevation of surface
z, in pressure (mb)
coordinates.
                                                                   elevation of the
                                                                   virtual surface z
                                                                   in pressure (mb)
                                                                   coordinates

             indicator of
             presence of cold
             surface layer
                                     Stage
                                     DELRO
                                                                   depth (m) of Layer
                                                                   0 in cell (i,j) at
                                                                   hour t .
                                                                         m
zt(i,j)      smoothed terrain        Stage  SIG
             elevations (m,  MSL)   •  ZT
zt(i,j)      5 min x 5 min averaged   RAW
             terrain elevation
             (m, MSL) of cell  (i,j)
z-,(i,j,t_)   elevation (m, MSL)      Stage
 1      ra    of top surface of       H1HO
             Layer 1.
                                                                   fraction (0<0y-.  .   cell  averaged east-
                                                                    west  flow  speed
                                                                    component  (m/sec)
                                                                    at  time  t   in the
                                                                    cold  laye?1
                                        99

-------
                                  Table  7.1.  (Concluded)
 Input
Variable
               Description
                                           Output
                         Source   Stage    Variable  .
Description
CD(i,j,t_)   drag coefficient
Ap/P00'.j»t )buoyancy parameter
                                      Stage
                                      PCD
                                      Stage
                                      ETA
                                        vL
                                                                        except nortn-so
                                                                        component
nwe(1»j»t )  cold layer growth
 vs      m   rate

Ap1(t )      indicator of presence
             of cold surface layer

h(i,j,tKn) i
u(i,j,t^)|  initial values of
v(i,j,t.,n) i  h, u, and v
                                      Stage
                                      ETA

                                      Stage
                                      DELRO
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
         ,.
         m

time rate of  ,
change (m sec  )
of cold layer
depth at boundary
point (ijj1) at
time t
      m
                                "2
             acceleration (m sec
             of east-west flow
             component at boundary
             point (iij1) at time
                     )

             same as UBC except
             north-south flow
             component.
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
                                        100

-------
                           Appendix A to  Section  7.
     Here  we  describe  a  numerical   procedure   for  deriving  solutions  of           tf
differential equations of the form                                                      it
                                                                                        '5;
where  all  coefficients  are  functions  of  time  and all  except K and  b are
functions of  (x,y,t).  We  pointed  out in Eq.  7-92 that the solution of (7-A1)
can be expressed in the form

          r(x,t.) =  p(x,t, |  xl
            ~' ly    rv~' 1 '  ~»
                       *0
where
                                                       t
                                                         b(t")dt"]      (7-A3)
                                                       t1

                         t
                        •
     x = x(t | xjyjt1) = | UCx'+xCfhy'+yCt'^.t'^dt"                     (7-A4)
                         t1
     y = yCtlx'.yU1) =  IvCx'+xCfhy'+yCfht'^dt"                     (7-A5)
                         t1
                                    101

-------
and
          a2 = 2K(t-t').                                                 (7-A6)
In both  our flow model  and in the  regional model  we are interested  in  the
values of the dependent variable r only at the grid points
          x = (lAx,JAy) , I,J=1. ..
and only at the discrete time intervals t =nAt,  n=l .....   Furthermore,  in  the
         •                                n
situations  of  concern  to us the spatial  variations  in S are of a  scale much
larger  than  UMAXAt or  V^At  and  the  temporal  variations  are  generally
slower than the time step At.  Under these conditions we can express (7-A2) in
the approximate form
                  p(lAx,JAy,tn+1l xltn)F(xJtn)dx'                         (7-A7)
                J
where
          rjj = r(!Ax,JAy,tn) '                                          (7-A8)
and
          F^itn) = r(xjtn) + S(x;tn)At.                                (7-A9)
Eq. 7-A7 expresses  the value of F at grid point (I,J) at the future time t +,
in terms of  its known values at  the  present time t .  Since the kernel p has
the form (7-A3), we can evaluate (7-A7) analytically if we express F(x',tn) in
polynomial form (or in a Fourier series).

     To do this we note first that the kernel p in (7-A7) has a maximum value
at the point
          x1 ss x* = lAx-x
          y1 - y* = JAy-y  \
                                     102
(7-A10)

-------
and  it  decreases to  zero  rather rapidly  away from this point.   In  fact,  if
K=0,  p  has  the delta  function form  given  earlier  by  (7-93).   Thus,  the
polynomial,  that  we  use to  represent F in  (7-A7)  should have maximum accuracy
in the  vicinity  of  the point x1 =  (x*,y*),  which we can find  by  solving the
transcendental  equations  (7-A10).   In  the  simple  case  where   the  spatial
variations  in  U  and V are much larger than Ax and Ay and the temporal  changes
in U  and V are  slow  compared to At,  (7-A10) yields the approximate solutions
(cf 7-94)
          x* = lAx -  U(lAx,JAy,tn+1)At 1                               (?_An)
          y* = JAy - V(lAx,JAy,tn+1)At j
The points  (x*,y*) and (lAx.JAy) are illustrated in Figure 7-A1.

     Using  computer  programming  notation (to  facilitate comparisons  of the
theory presented here with the actual computer code), we define

          1ST = [IFIX(xVAx) + 0.5]Ax                                  (7-A12)
          JST = [IFIX(yVAy) + 0.5]Ay                                  (7-A13)

As illustrated  in Figure  7-A1,  (1ST,JST)  is the grid  cell  center closest to
(x*,y*)  (taking  the  grid points  (I,J)  to  lie at  the corners of  each grid
cell).   In  preparation for  the expansion of F(x',t )  in polynomial  form,  we
                                                "   n
define the new coordinates
          n -                                                          (7-A14)
Note that the origin of the (n,£) system is the cell center (1ST,JST).  We can
                                    103

-------
now express F(x' ,tn) by the biquintic (5th order)  Lagrange polynomial
                       6
                       TT

                                            6 '
                                                                        (7-A16)
                   O   G   G   G
                   O   G   O   O
                   o   o   o   o/ o   o
• • •
0
o •
G •
         G   G

         G   G   G

         G   G   G   G   G   G
                                           / Back trajectory starting
                                            from (I,J) at time t +,,
                                            going back in time
                                            totn.
                                            GRID POINT (I,J)
                                                        IST.JST)
        Figure 7-A1.
            Illustration of the points used  in the numerical
            solution of Eq. 7-A1.  Circled grid points are those
            from which values of f and S are taken to derive a
            biquintic expansion of F(x',t )  about the point
            (IST.JST) (see Eq. 7-A9).~   n
where
                                                                       (7-A17)
:Jj =  F(iAx/2+IST,jAy/2+JST,tn)
                                                                        (7-A18)
                                    104

-------
and
          6 ,
          Fl   ( )  = product over all  k except  k=i,
         k=l                          .
            '
          J]   ( )  = product over all  1  except  l=j.
         1=1


Note  that  (a. ,b.)>  i,j=l. ..6 are the coordinates  in  (n>4)  space of the grid

points  at which the  F?.  are evaluated.   These  are the  circled grid points

shown in Figure 7-A1.

     To simplify (7-A16) let


               6 ,
          X, =11  (n-ak)                                              (7-A19)
           1  k=l     K



                 'a-bn)                                              (7-A20)
                      '                                                                 I


               A-                '
          L, -I!  (arak)                                              C
           1  k=l   1   k



          M, =n'(brbi)-                                            (7-A22)
           J  1=1   J   '


The  last  two  parameters  can  be evaluated  directly  using (7-A17).   We  get
                        o
          L2 = M2 =   768   '

          L3 = M3 = - 384   I                                           (7-A23)

          L4=M4=   384   r

          L5 = M5 = - 768
=  3840
                         _J
                                    105

-------
Now (7-A16) can be written
                     6   6   n  X4Y,
          F(x',tn)=2;  I  F.. ^                                    (7-A24)

                    1=1 j=l   J  i j



Now look at the expansion of X-:




          Xj = n,5 - 5n.4 - lOn.3 + 50n2 -t-9n-45                         (7-A25)


          X2 = n5 - 3q4 - 26n.3 + 78n2 + 25n - 75                        (7-A26)
          •




          Xg = n5 + 5n4 - lOn.3 - 50q2 + 9n + 45.                        (7-A27)




Thus, we can express the X- in the alternate form



               5


          X1 =2 a^n*                                                 (7-A28)
where  the coefficients  a-a  are the  known  values given  in  (7-A25 -  A27).


Similarly
          Yj =2-  ajp|p.                                                (7-A29)
Substituting (7-A28) and (7-A29)  into  (7-A24)  and we obtain
                     5   5
                                     106

-------
                6   6
           n    -o  -    n a.
where
          A   =2-  2,   F..-12JE .                                     (7-A31)
           «P  i=l j=l   !J L.H.

     We now have the polynomial  expansion of F(x',t )  that we  need  to  evaluate
(7-A7), but first we must change the integration variables in  (7-A7) from  x1  to
(n,4)«  We get
                         oo
                        -08
                              CI.*iVl'WJ'y''Vl'V5   At        (7-A32)
                                 F(n,4,tn)dnd4
where
                                                                       (7-A33)
             = _JL exp [- (Jtnr'V)1 3                               (7-A34)
                              2cz
(see Eq.  7-A3); and b* = b(x*fy*,tn).
     Let
          ex = x* - 1ST                                                (7-A35)
          Ey = y* - JST.                                               (7-A36)

Then,  representing x1  in (7-A33)  in terms  of  n we  obtain (from  7-A14  and
7-A10)
          <*'        exp [- -]
                                    107

-------
   where


             ex = ey/(Ax/2)
             /                                                           (7-A38)
             a  = a/(Ax/2)
                                                                          (7-A39)

  An expression  similar to (7-A37) describes * .
       Substituting  (7-A30),  (7-A37) and  the  analogous expression  for ,  1nto
  (7-A32) we obtain                                                       *

                or=0  ^=0   "P         ore                                  (7-A40)

 where
                                                                        (7-A41,
          v  =	i       f.R     r   -"  -v
           "	4 exp  [- 	Ji_  T  dj
                    J             2&2    J  d^                            (7-A42)
                    -08
These last two integrals can be evaluated analytically
and we get
               ex
                                                                       (7-A43)
                     X
                                   108

-------
Similar expressions give v ,  8=1,...6, except e  is replaced by e .
     In summary, the value of the dependent variable F  governed by (7-A1) is
obtained  at  time  level   n+1  at grid  point  (I,J) from  (7-A40)  where  A"   is
derived from (7-A31) using known values of F at time level n; and where the X
and v parameters are given by (7-A43).
                                    109                                                  i

-------
                           Appendix B to Section 7

     Here we describe  the  scheme we  have  developed  to provide the boundary
values that  the  numerical  analogues  of  the  differential  equations (7-86) -
(7-88) require but  which  the differential equations themselves do not need.

     The essence  of  our method is that we divide the u,  v,  and h fields  into a
base state and a perturbation component, and then  in the  governing equations
we set  all  sources  of the perturbation fields  to zero outside the region in
which  the prognostic  equations are  applied.    In addition  we  assume  that
perturbations do  not exist outside inflow points of the modeling  domain.  At
outflow points, we extrapolate interior values to estimate  u, v, and h  outside
the  boundary,  but  these  estimates are  only included  in the advection  and
diffusion terms  of  the  equation  and  are excluded  from  the  forcing  terms.

     Rewriting the governing  equations  (7-86, 87, and 88) for future reference
and manipulation, we have

          it *•$!+ *l *ii  c§  w***-
                                                                       (7-Bl)
          3v .   3v ,   3v .  v
          —~- + UK— + Vs— + T-
          8t   ^x    9y   n
                                                                       (7-B2)
                                    110

-------
                                                                                         j
                                                                                         if

where
          D_         D
          px - p§!  ' Py
Let
          u = u + u1                                                   (7-B5a)
          v = v + v1                                                   (7-B5b)
          h = h + h1                                                   (7-B5c)
where  barred  variables refer  to the base  state and  primed variables denote
fluctuations from this  state.   Our aim is  to  absorb  the effects of the given
large scale forcing terms P  and P  as well as initial and boundary conditions
                           x      y
in the base  state  variables (u, v,  h), and to let (u1, v1, h') represent the
perturbations from this state that arise as a result of forcing by the terrain
z.   and cooling  n,   within  the  simulated  domain.   Substituting  (7-B5a)  into
(7-B1) we get

             *     * =    *    ' * -'   * "'
Now let u and v be solutions of
                       = -Pv + fv                                       (7-B7a)
          n  u             x
                                    111

-------
                       = -P  - fu.                                      (7-B7b)
and assume-





                              .  32u]                                    (7-B8)
                          ax
          8u _ 8v ~ n ~ J

          it " at " u " l




Subtract (7-B7a) from (7-B6) and use (7-B8):
From (7-B2) and (7-B5b) we have
                                   ^zt          -           »2u
                                     I. - p    fu . fu, .  K[|_v
                                   8V,
                                      II  I
                                      2  J
                                     112
                                                                        (7-B9)

-------
Using (7-B7b) and (7-B8) we can reduce (7-B10) to
Now combine (7-B5c) and (7-B3):
          8h   8h'  . -ah  . -ah1  . nl3h  . Itl8h'
                           "ix  + U3*+ U9^
                             ay             8y             ay
                                                        I   £i>'
                                                                        (7-B12)
                                                 ay

where

                                                                        (7-B13)
and A is the model domain.  We define


               iH = n.                                                  (7-B14)
                                     113

-------
Subtracting this equation from (7-B12) we have
                                                                       (7-B15)
where we have assumed
                    -- 0.                                               (7-B16)

Now we write the basic equations (7-B9), (7-B11) and (7-B15) in the following forms:
                                     «i) » + Su + Si + K(§3jSf  +ra)   (7-B17)
                                       = + Sv + s; + K(+     )     (7-B18)
                                                 Sfc * Kh(|^' *      )   (7-B19)
where
          pu  = 8u/3x                                                   (7-B20)
       - Pv  s 9v/3y                                                   (7-B21)
          p  = 8u/8x + 8v/8y                                            (7-B22)
                                     114

-------
                                              ]|  1f  u. t  Q;
                    u   n           h
                                       .                  .               (7-B23)
                    C2 _     ,
                    ,-fi(u2+v2)  , otherwise
                   C2
                   TTT ErC^+v2)*5 - *  (u2-^2)*5]  ,  if  v1 *  0;
                   v   n           h                                    (7-B24)
          6' =
          HV
                   C2
                   -!i(u2+v2)^  , otherwise.
                   h

                   9u' , 9v'
                                            "                           (7-B26)
                                                                        (7"B29)
                                                                        (7-830)
                                                                        (7'B31)
and h satisfies (7-B14); u and v  satisfy  (7-B7a,  B7b) and (7-B8); and u, v and

h are defined by (7-B5).
                                     115

-------
     We require only first-order derivatives in evaluation of the p's and S's.
We use the notation
X=IAX
y=JAy
A („ \ - 9.3
Ay(gI,J)
^y
<=IAX
y=JAy
We define  several  different  AX and A  operators, each  of different orders of
accuracy.
                                                                       (7-B33)
                                                                       (7-B34)
                                                                       (7-B35)
                                                      glfj.2)3/(12«y)  (7-B36)
                                9IjJ.1)/(26y)                          (7-B37)
where 6  and 6  are the grid mesh dimensions.
       x      y
     The  following  operators  are  used  to  compute  first  derivatives  on
boundaries:
                                    116

-------
                             ,J * 169gI+l,J + 105gI+2,J ' 160gI+3,J
                                           )J + gI+6jJ]/(1205x)        (7-B38)
                    = C'171gI,J + 16"l,J+l + 105gI,J+2 - 160gI,J+3
                         + 65gI,J+4 - 9gI>J+5 + gM+6]/(120Sy)        (7-B39)
                      [171glfj
                                                                       (7-B40)
                                               glfj.6]/(1206y)         (7-B41)
The operators  defined  above are used to compute  the  variables  p ,  jj ,  ...  S1
defined  by Eqs.  (7-B20)  - (7-B31)  in  the sequence  illustrated by the  flow
chart  in  Figure 7B-1.   Following are' descriptions of the operations indicated
in the flow chart.

     Although the model  domain is a grid of 60 x 42 cells, we use an array of
66 x  48 cells in solving  the  governing equations (7B-1, 2 and  3)  in  FLOMOD.
The extra cells comprise a "frame"  3 cells  wide around the 60  x 42 modeling
domain.   Values  of all  parameters  within this  frame of  cells  are specified
whereas those  within the  modeling  domain are  predicted using  the governing
equations.  Specification  of the BAR  variables  Pu,  pv,  jj^,  S ,  Sy  and  S^
within the frame is straightforward since the variables u, v, h, etc. on which
they depend are given at all points in the 66 x 48 cell region.   Specification
of the  PRIME  variables  p^, p^, p^,  S^,  S^,  and S^ within the frame region is
guided  by the  desire  to avoid the  spurious generation  of disturbances just
outside the modeling  region that can subsequently enter the area of interest.
                                    117

-------
The prime  variables  u1, v1,  and h1  represent perturbations  from  the "base"
state represented  by (u, v,  h).  We  assume that all sources  of perturbation
energy,  such  as  terrain zt,  cooling  n'»  fitc.  are within  the 60  x  42 model
region.   Therefore, we assign zero  value to all prime  variables outside this
region,  namely  in the boundary  frame  area.   This  is  a  key  feature  of  our,
boundary scheme.    Finally,  specification  of u1,  v', and h1  in the frame zone
must be done  arbitrarily.   The prognostic equations (7-B1,  B2,  B3) cannot be
applied  in  the   frame  region  because  that would  require  values  of  all
parameters  outside the 66  x 48  domain.   A common method of estimating  the
values of  the dependent  variables outside the modeling area is to extrapolate
values  from the interior  of the simulation  area.   We  have found that even
crude extrapolation  techniques  give  acceptable  results  when used  with  the
advection-diffusion  equation.   But  the  same methods  generally  fail  when
utilized with systems of equations like (7-B1, etc.) because the errors in the
extrapolated  values  outside  the  simulation region give  rise  to disturbances
that spoil the accuracy of the solutions obtained within the model region.  We
attempt to alleviate this problem by setting all source terms that involve the
dependent  variables  equal  to zero outside  the  model  domain  (the   60  x 42
region) but we extrapolate values of these variables for use  in the  advection
and diffusion terms  of the equation.    In  particular,  if a  given point on the
edge of the 60 x 42 region is a point of inflow, then we assume  u' =  v1  = h'  =
0  at all  3 cells of  the  frame  zone  adjacent to  this point.   For  example,

        _u'(l,J) = u'(2,J) = u'(3,J) = 01
          v'(l,J) = v'(2,J) = v'(3,J) = 0  } if [u(4,J) + u'(4,J)]>  0
          h'U.J) = h'(2,J) = h'(3,J) = 0j

At points  of  outflow,  we  use the following extrapolation,  illustrated for  the
case of point (4,J):
                                     118

-------
READ FIXED

   FIELDS

    zt.f.
 INITIALIZE

 u'=v'=h'=0

	 READ
u. v, h. CD. g'. n. n'
*
r
COMPUTE
BAR_ VARIABLES
/Jv. 3u. P_h
Su. Sy. Sh
'
r
COMPUTE
PRIME VARIABLES
/J'u» P'v> P'h*
S'u. S'v. S'h.
\
r
CALL SOLVER
COMPUTE NEW
u'. V. h'


              N
                                                  to
                                                  c
                                                  o
                                                  *•*
                                                  m

                                                  I
                                                  o

                                                  Q
                                                  O


                                                  O
                                                  CO

                                                  u
                                                  CO
                                                  3
                                                  O>
      119

-------
     u'Cl.J) = u'(2,J) = u'(3,J) = 4U  H
     v'(l,J) * v'(2,J).= v'(3,J) =4V
     h'Cl.J) = h'(2,J) = h'(3,J) = 4n
if [u(4,J) + u'(4,J)]< 0
where
        = - 2u'(5,J) + (l/2)u'(6,J)  +  (5/2)11'(4.J)
etc.
Calculation of the BAR variables.
     Figure 7B-2 shows the grid on which the BAR  variables p  , S  , etc. are to
be  evaluated  and the  derivative  operators that  are  to be  employed at  each
point.
     From (7-B20) - (7-B22)
          PhU,J) » Pud,J)
                             (7-B42)

                             (7-B43)

                             (7-B44)
and from (7-B26) - (7-B28)
                                    120

-------
                                                                      (7-B45)
          SV(I,J) = G
                                                                      (7-B46)
                                                                      (7-B47)
in  evaluating the  six expressions above,  the operators A   and  A  should be
selected  as  follows  (see  Fig. 7B-2):
,  if 1=66;
,  if 1=2 or 1=65;
,  if 1=3 or 1=64;
,  if 1=4-63.

,  if 0=1;
,  if 0=48;
,  if J=2 or 0=47
,  if 0=3 or 0=46
,  if 0=4-45
 here  2A ,  2AV,  etc.  are  defined  by  (7-B32)  -  (7-B41),
        x   y
                                                                      (7-B48)
                                                                      (7-B49)
                                    121

-------
H»'
17 1
rtfi
AC
j
44,



tf

;
5*


4,


«r






*
*x
2'
f
»





'
k '


1 J


i i
4/

,
• i





i 1
1 1





>
_/
e'
^x

»
» 4





' '
k


>x-:-x^^X:x".vX::::;::::X:::::X:::::::X:X:
;:;:g;:;i:;:;:x:;:i:;x::;:;x;:;:;:ix;x;:;:;:;:;:;:;:;

X:X:X:::::X:::::X:::::::::X:X:::::X::;:::::;:::::::::::



; * «.
•
K
« -r *


"^•'•"•'•'•^'••-'•'•'•'•^.•r'-v.xvX'X^'X'X'X'X*
'

r
	 « » 	 eA.
                                      4Ay	
                                               0"U 	r+^4 yy.*^*^*r1*?*^*.*?^*
                                               I








;.;*X«|iX'

(11



• ::*X::

ill









«

1

•'.•'.•'•'. :i
::::::::::*
I'X'I-"*
•X X-ll
:::;|:::::i
.;.;. w *
                                                                           -»»••





et
r


.
r •»«•»•
***•••
1
i



. . I •
I
I






'
*
(

I
I

I

\A
                                                        60  61  62  63   64  65   66
         Figure 7B-2.  Grid network on which p ,  p , p., S , Sy, and S.
                       are computed.   Different spatial derivative operators
                       AX and A  are required in these calculations as  indicated.
Calculation of the PRIME variables
     The  PRIME  variables  p^,  p^,...S^  are defined  on the  same  66 x 48  grid
system as the BAR variables  but  the calculation procedure is different.  As we
noted  earlier all  PRIME  variables  are set to zero outside the  60 x 42  cell
simulation area.  Thus, we assume
                                     122

-------
      Pid.J) = PV(I>J> = Ph(I*J) = su(I»J) = sv(I>J) = sh(I>J) = °'    (7"B50)
           if I = 1,2,3,64,65, or 66; or 0=1,2,3,46,47, or 48.

    all  other grid points, namely 1=4-63, J=4-45 compute the PRIME variables as
   llows:
where
                                       i j * v! j>  " -
                          'I,J    I,J    '      '      hj

                                             if u'   * 0
                                                                       (7-B51)
                                                                       (7-B52)
                         C2     v                     v
                         VI,J   hI,J    '      '      hI}J
where
                                                                       (7-B53)

                                                                       (7-BS4)

                                                                       (7-B55)
                                    123

-------
In equations  (7-B53,. . ,7-B56)  the derivative  operators  A  and  A  should  be
                                                          X       }r _
selected  as follows when they  operate on  PRIME variables:
                         EAX   if 1=63;
                    \    2Ax   if I=5 or I=62;                          (7'B57)
                         4AX   if 1=6 or 1=61;
                     ( _ 6AX   if 1=7-60.
                               if J=45;
                               if 0=5 or J=44;                          (7-B58)
                               if J=6 or J=43;
                               if J=7-42.
In  Eqs.  (7-B53,..,7-656)  use gAx  and 6\  in  all  applications  to the  BAR
variables  u,  v,  and  h.   In  this  regard  it should  be  repeated that  Eqs.
(7-B51,..,7-B56) are applied only to columns 1=4-63 and to rows J=4-45,  and at
these points  the 6-th  order  operators can  be applied to  BAR variables  (see
7-B48 and  7-B49).   At  all  other points  the PRIME variables  are  set to  zero
(see 7-B50).


Calculation of the dependent variables u'. v'. and h'.
     The three  dependent variables  are computed at each  time step using the
prognostic  equations  (7-B17,..,7-B19)  within the 60 x 42 cell modeling region
bounded  by  columns  1=4 and 63 and by rows J=4 and 45.   These  calculations are
done in  the following steps.
                                    124

-------
     First we define the function
          A(I,J) = SOLVER(I,J,IST,JST,£6x5,K)                          (7-B59)
which represents the biquintic algorithm described in Appendix 7A that is used
to solve the differential equations numerically.   In Eq.  (7-B59), 1ST and JST are
given functions  of I.J.u1  and  v'  (see  7-A12,  A13); 4gxg  is an  array  of 36
variables  at  grid points  surrounding  (1ST,JST)  which we specify below (see
also Fig. 7-A1); and K is the diffusivity.   The function  SOLVER can be used to
predict  the next  values of  u1,  v1, and  h'  at  each  of the  60 x  42  points
defined above.   Consider each of the 3 variables  in turn.
     1.   u'(I,J,N+l) in 60 x 42 model domain.
               Step 1.
                         B*(I,J) = SOLVER(I,J,IST,JST,46x6,0)
                              where
                                   ^6x6 = PU + Pu
               Step 2.
                         C*(I,J) = SOLVER(I,J,IST,JST,e6x6,K)
                              where
               Step 3.
                    u'(I,J,N-H) = C*(I.J)*exp(-B*(IfJ))

     2.    v'(I,J,N+l) in 60 x 42 model domain.
          Same steps as in u1 calculation except replace Pu> B^, u'(N), Su and
          su by P«» Pi» V'(N)> "SM and Si> respectively.
                                    125

-------
     3.    h'(I,J,N+l)  in  60  x 42 model  domain.
          Same steps as u', except  replace  pu,  p^, u'(N), $u,  and S^ by ph,
          Pi,  h'(N), S. and S/,  respectively.   Replace K by'-K^.   In  order to
         'avoid the  problems  that  zero  or negative  fluid  depth  predictions
          would cause, perform the  following  operation after each time step:

               IF((h'(N+l) -i- h(N+l)).LT.1.0) h1  (N+l)  = 1.0-h(N+l)

     As we  noted  earlier,   values of  the  dependent variables in the  boundary
frame region  are  assigned zero  values at all  inflow  points  and  are predicted
by simple extrapolation of  the  interior values at  points of outflow.   Consider
first the western boundary  zone.

     4.   u'(N+l), v'(N+l)  and  h'(N-H) in western  boundary zone  1=1-3, J=4-45.
          If (u(4,J,N) + u'(4,J,N))  >  0,  then
                  u'(l,J,N-H) ? u'(2,J,N-H)  =  u'(3,J,N+l) = 0

          Same holds for v1  and h1.

          If (u(4,J,N) + u'(4,J,N))  <0),  then
                  u'(l,J,N+l) = u'(2,J,N+l)  =  u'(3,J,N+l)
                    = -2u'(5,J,N) +  (V2)u'(6,J,N) + (5/2)u'(4,J,N)
          Similar expressions  are used for v1  and h1.

     5.   u'(N+l), v'(N+l)  and h'(N+l) in the eastern boundary zone 1=64-66,
          J = 4-45.
          If  (u(63,J,N) + u'(63,J,N)) < 0, then

               u'(64,J,N-H) = u'(65,J,N+l) = u'(66,JfN+l) = 0
                                    126

-------
     Same holds for v1 and h1.

     If (u(63,J,N) + u'(63,J,N)) < 0, then

          u'(66,J,N+l) = u'(65,J,N+l) = u'(64,J,N+l)

               = (l/2)u'(61,J,N) - 2u'(62,J,N) + (5/2)u'(63,J,N)

     Similar expressions hold for v1 and h1.                                        )
6.   u'CN+l), v'(N-KL) and h'(N+l) in the southern zone 1=4-63, J=l-3.
     If(v(I,4,N) + v'(I,4,N))> 0, then

          u'(I,l,N+l) = u'(I,2,N+l) = u'(I,3,N+l) = 0.

     Same holds for v1 and h1.

     If (v(I,4,N) H- v'(I,4,N)) < 0, then
               -2u'(I,5,N)

     Similar expressions hold for v1 and h1.

7.    u'CN+l), v'(N+l) and h'(N+l) in the northern boundary zone
          I = 4-63, J = 46-48.

     If (v(I,45,N) + v'(I,45,N)) < 0, then

          u'(I,46,N+l) = u'(I,47,N+l) = u'(I,48,N+l) = 0

     Same holds for v1 and h'.
                               127

-------
          If (v(I,45,N)  + v'(I,45,N))  >  0,  then

                            = u'(I,47,Nn)  = u'(I,46,

                           (I,43,N)  -  2u'(I,44,N) + (5/2)u'(I,45,N)
          Similar expressions hold for v1  and h1.
     The specifications  of u1, v1  and h1  given  in steps 4-7 above  give  the
dependent variables at time  step  N+l at all  boundary  zone  areas except the 4
corner  zones.   The southwest  corner zone is illustrated in Figure  7B-3.   In
each  of the  four corner  zones  we  will  assign  the dependent  variables  the
average of the  values  computed on the edges of these zones, as illustrated in
the  Figure.   For example, referring to  Figure 7B-3 and  keeping in  mind that

          u'(4,l,N) = u'(4,2,N) = u'(4,3,N),

and similarly for v1  and h1;  and that

          u'(l,4,N) = u'(2,4,N) = u'(3,4,N),

and similary for v1 and h', we assume in the southwest corner zone that
          u'(I,J,N+l) = l/2[u'(4,l,N+l) + u'CM.N-KL)]
                                         1=1,2,3 and J=l,2,3.

and similarly for v1  and h1.   We use a similar method to  compute the  dependent
variables in the northwest, northeast, and southeast corner zones.
                                    128

-------
}
?J .
t WE
j BOUN
6» •
i ZO
•i -1
• i
ST
DARY
•
UE
•
41— JL—
3 S&igSS*
tt-im
s SOUTHWEST*
&? CORNERS*
2 <&&ffMSSSS£&i&t'.
••::'-':X' 7nwc ::'-v">
&£•& tUIHC v.:-.-.-.
, . 4 (9GRI.pPpl.NTS>
l«1 2
3
<
1
4

h' •.


*, !•!•!•'
•^»-

•:«•:-:•:•:•:•:•:»:•:•:•:•:•:•:•:»:•:•:•:••• •:•:•:•:•: •
S.MODEL DOMAINS x::;:.;::
:»:•:•.•: :•: :•:•:•:•:•:•: :•:•:•:•:•:•:-.•.•:•••:• •:• •:•'•••:
• • •
	 SOUTH BOUNDARY ZONE
• • •
567
Figure 7B-3.  Illustration of the southwest corner zone and the
              west and south boundary zones of the model domain.
                            129

-------
5YYYYYYYYYYYY
                               •-
                               si
                               O. 0)

                               u. "
                               O g


                               8 S.
                               o ~
                               O <»
                               7 O

                               2 «



                               11
                               If
                               e o
                               £ -o
                               o c
                               (A (0
                               CO
                               I

                               r-


                               S
I-
D
Q.
       V V V v V V V
               130

-------
                                   SECTION 7
                                 PROCESSOR P8

INTRODUCTION
     This processor determines the top surfaces H2 and HS of layers 2 and 3 of
the  regional  model, it  computes  mean vertical velocities  on  these surfaces,
and it estimates convective cloud updraft speeds and other parameters required
in  the  specification of pollutant  fluxes across  surfaces H2  and  Ha.   All  of
these quantities play important roles in the regional model, but unfortunately
none of  them  is directly measurable.  In this  section we outline a procedure
for  deriving  estimates  of these  parameters  that are  consistent  both  with
observational  data and physical-principles.

DERIVATION OF BASIC EQUATIONS

     Recall from Part 1 that
          H2(x,y,z,t) = z2(x,y,t) - z                                    (8-1)

where Z2  is nominally  the elevation of the top  of  the mixed layer.  During
clear daylight  hours,  z2 is the highest elevation that nonbuoyant  pollutants
can reach.- When convective clouds are present, we take  Z2 to  be the elevation
of  cloud  bases,  specifically,  the so-called lifting condensation  level (LCL).
In  this  case  pollutants  entering the  updrafts that  feed  individual  cumulus
clouds can  rise above  elevation z2 and  proceed as far as the  elevation of the
cloud tops,  which  we  define  to  be the  elevation z3 of the  top of Layer  3.

                                    131

-------
When convective clouds  are  absent,  z3 is defined  to  be z2 + h3,  where h3 is
some constant depth  of  order 100 meters.   Figure 8-1 illustrates the surfaces
H2 and Hs  in  a  regional domain  in  the  typical  condition where cumulus clouds
are present over only a portion of the modeling region.
     We  showed  in  Part  1,  Eq.  (4-20)  that  z2  satisfies the  differential
equation
              I-CT
                                   .
                                     V
                                                          (8-2)
Here w   is the entrainment velocity  (represented in Part 1 by  f8/A6);  w2 is
the  cell  averaged vertical air speed at  elevation z2; w   is  the effective,
cell averaged cumulus updraft velocity at cloud base (i.e., at z2); vj,. is the
horizontal  wind  velocity at  elevation z2;  and  ac is  the fractional  area
covered by convective (cumul.us) clouds.  The last parameter is measurable from
  Figure 8-1.
Illustration of surfaces H2 and H3 during situations in which
convective clouds, cover only a portion of the modeling region.
                     132

-------
satellite  photographs  and  it  is  the  only  variable in  (8-2) that  can  be


estimated  reliably.   We  will  assume  that  crc(x,y,t)  is  an  input  to  this


processor. .




     All  the other variables  in (8-2) must be inferred through comparisons  of


this equation with certain  measured data and other physical  principles.   This


is the task we undertake in this section.
     An  auxiliary  relationship that will aid  in  the estimation of w   is  the


water  vapor mass  conservation equation.   Using Eq.  2-29 of  Part  1 we  can


express the layer averaged water vapor mixing ratio  q in the form





           a             31nVi                A

          at <^j + j "lit1 + SJH-SH^J  * V I Fj-i. j - Fj,j3 = °      ^
                                               J



where  .  is  the  cell  averaged mixing ratio  in  layer j, A is the horizontal
         w

area of  a  cell,  V. is the volume  of a cell lying in  layer j  and F. v is  the
                  J                                                 J > K

flux of material across surface H. to or from layer  k.  To arrive at (8-3), we
                                 J

dropped  the horizontal  flux  terms  in  (2-29)  of Part  1 that  represent  the


effects of  subgrid  scale  variations in the  horizontal wind v.,,.  Our interest


is in 3  during  periods when cumulus clouds are present (i.e., a  / 0).   If


we assume that the advection term in  (8-3)  is  negligible in these conditions


compared to the  other terms, we obtain with the aid of Eqs. (4-3) and (4-21b)


of Part I
                    we)(qc-3) + 3Z2 - (q* - 

3) H3 (8-4) -sZ3l = 0 133


-------
where     z2 = 3z2/9t, z3 = 3z3/3t and



          H3 = 23 + V3'2z3• - wa.                                         (8-5)
Also,  q   represents the mixing ratio  in  cumulus clouds and a   is  the mixing
       V*                                                      ^^


ratio  just  above the  elevation  of cloud  tops,  i.e.,  just  above z3.   If we



assume  that the  horizontal  advection  term  in  (8-5)  is  negligible,  we  can



reduce (8-4) to





           8          1       W2 -We




                                  C                                       (8-6)

                               •







and after multiplying by (z3-z2) and rearranging terms we obtain







          Q-O"       *M                '           Q O
           c c      fln«   _                       c c




          l-"c  C   "             °C"°   "'   l~°e                     (8-7)

                       •

                    'R^ZS * ^(Q^ ~ s)



where
          M3(x,t) =    q(x,z,t)dz                               .          (8-8)



                      z2(x,t)





and


                                                                          (8-9)
     At each of the sites x^ of rawin  stations we have available measurements
                          ~m


of  q(z),  V2u(2) and  8(z) at  each observation time.  We  also  know o  and  z3



(where a  ?  0)  everywhere from satellite data.  Using all this  information  we



can  derive  estimates of  all  the  parameters in  (8-7)  except w  and w  , and
                                    134

-------
thereby  we can  derive  a  relationship that  w  and w  must satisfy  at each
rawin  site x .   This relationship can subsequently be employed in conjunction
-ith  (8-2) to  obtain  estimates  of  z2,  w   and w   throughout  the modeling
lomain.
     In order to use the rawin  data and Eq. 8-7 in this way, it is convenient
 to  integrate (8-7)  between  each  set  of measurement  times.   Let t0  and tx
 denote two  successive  times when rawin  observations  are  gathered at a given
 station.   Ordinarily,  tt  and t0 will be 12 hours apart, but shorter intervals
 are possible.  Integrating  (8-7) we get
             l£/- wc - we(l-ac)3 - weqcac]dt = M3(ti) - M3(t0)
          to
                                                                         (8-10)
                    tl            q a.
               +       [w2(3 * p^T ) • Vs + w3(qOB-3)]dt
where all  variables  are evaluated at a  given rawin  site x  .  We assume that
                                                           ~m
only w  and w  are unknowns in this equation.  For all other parameters we  can
      C      c
use the following expressions.
     First, we adopt the approximation

          qc ~ q(z2).                                                    (8-11)
Then
          qc(t) * q(z2,t0) * qc(t-to)                                    (8-12)
                                     135

-------
where
          qc = Cq(z8,ti) - q(z2,to)](t1-t0)"1                            (8-13)
and
          q(z2,t0) = q(xm,z=z2(to),t0).
Next, we approximate z2 and Zs by
                 = F(q(2B,zftn)>  e(xm,z,tn))      iFO.l                  (8-14)

where F is a function that is defined later;  and

                     z2(t ) + 100 meters,  if  a (x _,t )=0;
                                              C  m  n   n=0,l           (8-15)
                     from satellite data,   otherwise

          Z3(t) = Cz3(ti) - za(t0)] (trto)"1.                           (8-16)
     Since (8-4) bears  the  implicit assumption that HS  >  0,  which we adopted
in  anticipation of application  to  situations  where  convective  clouds  are
present  and  growing, we must ensure  that the  value  of £3  given by  (8-16)
satisfies

          Z3 > 0.                                                       (8-17)
This  constraint  is  most  likely  to be  violated  when  a  = 0  either  at
observation time to or at tj, but not both.

     In this instance we can adjust the estimate of z2 at the hour that a  = 0
to achieve is > 0.   Adjusting,z2 is consistent with the position adopted later
that  only a  range  of' z2 values  can be  estimated  with confidence  from the
measured data at any rawin site and time.
                                    136

-------
     We approximate the temporal  variations in q^ by

          q. - q(z3),                .                                   (8-18)
and from  this  we  assume in analogy with the form we  adopted  for  q  ,  i.e., Eq.
8-12,

          q.Ct) = q(z3,t0) + qjt-to)                                 (8-19a)
where
          q. = CqUa.ti) - q(z3,t0)] (trto)"1.                         (8-19b)
From (8-8) we get
          M3(xffl,t1) =    q(xm,z,t1)dz                                  (8-20)
and
                         q(xffl,z,t0)dz                                   (8-21)
Similarly,
          3 = 3 + 3(t-t0)                               (8-22)
where
          3 = [3 - 3]/(ti-t0)                           (8-23)
and
                       Ma(tn)
     The  vertical   air  speeds  w2  and  w3  that  enter  into  (8-10)  will  be
approximated by
                                    137

-------
          w2(xffl,t) = wCx^CtO.t)  ,  to < t < tu                       (8-25)

          wsQ^.t) = w(xm,z3(t),t)   , t0 < t < ti;                      (8-26)

where w(x,z,t)  is  the  vertical  air speed at  site x,  elevation z(MSL) at hour
t. There  are  various methods  of determining w from the  set of rawin data but
we will not consider any of them here.   We will  simply assume that some means
of estimating w exists  and  we will  leave it to  the model user  to  choose  a
feasible  scheme.   [In  implementating  the present regional model,  we  used the
method developed by Bullock  (1983)].   The elevations  z2(t) and z3(t) at which
w(t) is evaluated in (8-25) and (8-26) are taken to  be

          *2(t) = Z2(xni,t0) + Z2(t-t0)     t0 < t <  tj                  (8-27)
where
          22 = [Z2(Xffl,t1) -Z2(Xfn,t0)]/(t1-to);

          2a(t) = Z3(xra>t0)^ za(t-to)                                  (8-28)

with z3 given by (8-16).

     Now  that we  have  formulated  approximate  expressions  for  each of  the
parameters  in (8-10)  except w  and  wfi, we  can define a  constant wc  which
satisfies
wc )  j~ dt =  ]  [3 + (Jc(qc-s)]wedt

                                                              (8-29)
              to   c       'to
                      A(xffl; to.
                                    138

-------
where WG = w^; t0,ti) and
                                           f'1
                      = Ms(ti) - M3(t0) +    [w2(3                   (8-30)
                                            to
                         00,23 +
The parameter w  is the effective cumulus cloud updraft speed w  character! s-
                c                                               c
tic of  the air mass in the  vicinity  of the rawin site xm during the interval
to £  t  < ti between observations.  In  other words,  in the  vicinity  of >e we
assume
          Wc0<>t) = Wr0$m; to.ti)       t0 < t < ti, and
                     u   '                  "                            (8-31)
                                         X->L,  < 6
                                        I ~ ~m I
where  w   satisfies  (8-29).   Note  that  (8-29)  relates  wr  to  the  unknown
         U                                                   C
entrainment speed w , which we consider next.
     Continuing  our  examination of  the  region around x^,  let  us  look at the
air  parcel  trajectory  that  ends  at xm  at time  ti.   Figure  8-2  depicts it
beginning from its position at time to.  Writing Eq. (8-2)  in the form
          dz     w        cr
                    - "
                       c
and integrating  it  from to to ti along the trajectory ending at xm at time
we get
                                    139

-------
                                  tl         tl
                                    w       C    a.
                    -nGi.W-c. .
                                  to         to
                                                                       (8-33)
                                  + 0) wedt
                                      to
where 0 indicates  that  all  parameters   in  the  integrand  are  evaluated at
space-time points  along  the trajectory between  x^ and  x   (see Figure 8-2).
Since xm  is  the  site  of  a rawin  station and  ti is  an observation time, we can
get  Z2(xm,ti), or  more precisely a  range of values in which  we expect z2 to
lie,  from (8-14).   But  x^ is generally  not the  location  of  meteorological
measurements so z2(xi,to) can  only be  estimated from interpolation procedures.
Let us suppose that through a  combination  of  measurements and  interpolation we
are able to say with confidence that
                                = Az2(xm;t1,t0)  ±
               oz2(xin;t1,t0)
                                                                        (8-34)
where Az2 and  6z2  are known, partly from  (8-14).  We  can now write (8-33)  in
the form
                      ti            ti          ti
                      f             fas
          AZ2 ± dz2 =6 -r^-dt - wr(t> TT§- dt +(h w dt.                 (8-35)
                      T A  c       J     c     T
                       t0            t0        ''to
The cloud cover  fraction or(x,t) is known everywhere and we assume that w2 is
also  available  at  all   points  and  hours.   Thus,   (8-35)   contains  only  2
unknowns:  w  and w .
            c      e
                                    140

-------
            Figure 8-2.  Illustration of the air parcel trajectory
                         that arrives at point x  at hour ti.  Point
                         xi denotes the parcel's location at time
     Following  a  number of  previous  investigators  (see,  for example,  the
 *aview by Artoz  and Andre,  1980) we shall assume that the kinematic heat flux
at z2 is proportional to that at the ground, namely
                 =   = aQ
                                                      (8-36)
where  Q  is  the known  surface  heat flux  and a  is  a constant.   Recall  that
          we =
                    z=z2
A6
                                                       (8-37)
where A6  is  the effective jump  in  potential  temperature across the elevation
z2.  By  comparing simple mixed-layer growth  rate formulas with measurements,
                                    141

-------
Artoz and Andre (1980) found that a  simple, reasonably accurate expression is
                                                                       (8-38)
where v = d8/dz evaluated at  z=Z2+e  and  h=z2-zt, where z^ is the local terrain

elevation.   Eq. (8-38) suggests that within  the  vicinity  of rawin station x .

we can approximate w  by




          WpQS.t)  = G(xm;t0)t1)Q(x,t)    ,  t0  < t < ti;                  (8-39)
                                         x-x_   < 6
                                         ~ ~m
where G  is an  unknown  function that we suspect  from  (8-38)  is of the order
                                                                       (8-40)
where T is some instant in the interval  to to ti.
     Substituting (8-39) into (8-35) we obtain
                        l               j            !

                     I  *           r  o-          r
          Az2 ± 6z2 =014- dt " wr CpT~ dt + G(pQdt,                (8-41)
                     7    c         J    c       j
                       to             to            to


where  the  integrals are  all  along the  trajectory shown in  Fig.  8-2.   Making

use  of   (8-39)  in  (8-29) and  substituting the  result   into (8-41) we get
                                    142

-------
AZ2 ± 6z2 =
                        dt -
                      [G J
                                     [3 + ac(qc-3)]
                                                                        (8-42)
                                   ti

                         + A] + G(^ Qdt
                                  i
                                   to
where
                      dt
               ti



               to
                                                                        (8-43)
            dt
We repeat that in our notation^ C^t denotes integration of £ evaluated  at  the
         jr notation\ £dt

          £tl       * o
         >(u Cdt denotes
          J>tn
fixed point *_ whileQ Cdt denotes integration of C(x,t) along the space-time


coordinates illustrated in Figure 8-2.


     In expression  (8-42),  G  is the only unknown parameter.   For each number

AZ2 in the interval indicated on the left-hand side of (8-42), i.e.,


          AZ2 - 6Z2 < AZ2 < AZ2 + 6z2                                   (8-44)

there corresponds a G given by
G = [AZ2 - ^) ^_ dt
                                       tl
                                        Qdt
                                                   [3 + ac(qc -
                                                                        (8-45)
                                   -i
                                                                                        1
                                                                                        vl
                                    143

-------
Let us assume that  the  set of G associated  through  (8-45)  with  the  set of
defined by (8-44) lies on the interval
Only positive values of  G  are physically meaningful  because  both w   and  Q are
positive during convective conditions.   Therefore,  if the  interval1  defined by
(8-46) contains only negative values,  one or more of the parameters  entered in
(8-45)  have  erroneous  values.   When  this situation  arises  in practice,  we
propose to alter the values of the various terms in (8-45)  until the resulting
G interval at  least contains positive values.   At the  most  we would want the
largest positive values of G to be consistent with (8-40).  Alterations of the
parameters in  (8-45) should  proceed  according to  a fixed rule in  which the
parameter  suspected of  being  the  most  inaccurate  is  altered  first,  and
succeeding terms  in the  hierarchy are modified only  after adjustments to the
least  accurate terms have  failed to  produce  the desired values  of G.   The
alterations made  in the  value of any  one  parameter  should be confined to the
smallest interval  in which one could reasonably assume that the correct  value
lies.   Regarding  the  order in  which  the parameters in  (8-45)   should be
altered, we propose the following hierarchy based solely on intuition:

          qc, qc, 3» Q, w2, AZ2, ac                                 (8-47)
     Suppose that through  a process like that described above we have managed
to  extract  from  (8-45)  an interval  of G  that  contains some positive values.
Our~interest  is  only  in  the positive  values,  i.e.,  the G  in  the interval
                                    144

-------
     To each  G in this  interval there  corresponds a w  through relationship
(8-29), namely
                                                                        (8-49)
          "c = CWF§ dt]" {A + G   [3 + CTc (qc
                        C
                         Q(xm,t)dt}
Let the interval defined by (8-48) and (8-49) be represented by
          wc - 6wc < wc <  wc+ 6wc .                                     (8-50)

Like  G,  wc  is  intrinsically a positive quantity.  Therefore,  if  (8-50)  does
not  lie  at  least  partially  on  the  positive,  real  axis,  we must  perform
alterations  on  parameter  values  in (8-49) until  the  interval  (8-50)  contains
some positive values.   The procedure should be similar to that used to obtain
positive  G  values,  except  in  the  case of  w   we  should alter  only  those
parameters in (8-49)  that do not  appear  in  the expression for G.   Otherwise,
we would cause changes in the G values as well.  Thus, the suggested hierarchy
of parameters  that should  be  modified,  if necessary, to  achieve  positive  w
values is the following:

          q., M3, w3, za.                                                (8-51)
     At the conclusion of this operation we obtain a positive set of WG values
and a  positive  set of G values, both of which apply only to the time interval
to <  t < ti and within the vicinity of rawin station m.  The next step is to
apply  the same  procedures  to  the rawin observations made  at  station m+1 at
hours  to  and ti to obtain  the corresponding sets of WG and G values for that
                                    145

-------
site.   Once values have been  obtained for all  rawin  stations  for the  interval
to < t  <  ti,  we can  interpolate values for w  and G  at all  grid points  in  the
model  domain.   With these  fields  and the known wind  fields  v^Cx.t),  w2(x,t),
and the cloud cover  distribution cr , we  can solve (8-2)  for 22 at each grid
point and each  hour t in  the interval t0  <  t  < ti.   By  repeating  the  entire
process for the  next  observation  interval ^ < t  <  t2,  we  can obtain  22  and
all the other necessary fields during this period.

     Before outlining  the  specific  sequence  of steps necessary  to  implement
the procedure described above,  let  us comment briefly  on  the  philosophy of
this approach.  Many prognostic models have been developed in recent years  for
predicting the  mixed-layer depth 22  given the surface heat flux Q,  the mean
vertical velocity w2  and other physical quantities.   These models are  not well
suited to our needs for several reasons.

     First, nearly all  these  models  are one-dimensional and therefore they do
not take into account advection and horizontal  variations in 22, w2, Q and the
other governing fields.

     Second,  our interest  in regional modeling is with historical  situations
where available observations exist  from which 22  can be  inferred,  at least
approximately,  not only at the initial moment to of the  simulation period but
also at discrete intervals throughout it.  In general, the 22 predictions  of a
model  initialised at  to  will  become  increasingly  inconsistent  with later
observations  due to  deficiencies  in the model and errors  in the input data.
Our position  is that the  values of  22  inferred  from meteorological observa-
tions made during the simulation period  are more credible than  the predictions
                                    146

-------
made by a  model.   Therefore, in our approach the physical principles on which
models are  based  are employed in the  role  of interpolating and extrapolating
the discrete observations.  This is the essence of the roles performed by Eqs.
(8-2), (8-45) and (8-49) in our scheme above.

     At this time,  the proposed procedure has not been tested.   Therefore, it
should be  viewed  as the starting point in the development of a scheme capable
of providing the various required parameter fields.

     In the  remainder  of this section we present the detailed steps needed to
produce an operational processor.
Stage ZQ
     As noted  in  the introduction, when cumulus clouds are not present during
daylight  hours,  z2  is the  highest elevation  that  dry thermals  produced by
surface heating can reach; however, once cumulus clouds form, z2 is defined to
be the  lifting condensation  level.   In either case, z2  can  be inferred, at
least approximately,  from radiosonde  data and we expressed this  in the form
(8-14) of a function F that relates z2 to the potential temperature and mixing
ratio vertical profiles.   Our first task here  is  to develop an explicit form
for F.
                                                               I
     Our approach  stems  from the  realization that turbulence  acts to destroy
spatial variations  in  scalar quantities.  According  to the empirical K-theory
                                    147

-------
description of  turbulent  mixing, the  rate at which spatial  fluctuations  are
eliminated  is  inversely  proportional  to  the square  of the size  A. of  the
fluctuation. This  is  evident  from  the  Fourier  transform  of  the  classical
diffusion equation
                                                                        (8-52)
          v v      ^
                                                                               j
From this equation one finds that the Fourier amplitude A of spatial  variation 1
in the scalar c of wave number k = 2n/\ decays in time at the rate              ;

          |£ = -Kk2A.                                                   (8-53)
                                                                                i
Sources  of  c can  generate  small  scale variations  but  turbulence  always  :;
destroys them.                                                                  Tj
                                                                                _<

     These observations suggest that if second and higher order derivatives of  ]
a conservative, scalar quantity remain large for an extended period of time at  j
points  in the fluid that are  far from  sources,  the intensity  of  turbulent  \
mixing at  these  points,  as manifested in the diffusivity K in Eqs. (8-52) and  |
                                                                                i
(8-53), must  be  very small.   Otherwise, the small-scale variations that cause  .1
                                                                                V
large values of these derivatives would be eradicated.                           •

     Thus, our basic premise is that in cloud free conditions we can estimate
the ejevation  at which the vertical diffusivity becomes vanishingly small by
examining  the vertical  profiles  of the  second, and psrhaps  higher,  order
derivatives of the mixing ratio and potential  temperature, both of which are
(approximately)   conservative  quantities  that  can  be  derived  from  the
radiosonde measurements.

                                     148

-------
     Consider  for  example  the  classical  profiles  of  mixing  ratio  q  and
potential  temperature  0 in  dry,  convective  conditions  illustrated in Figure
8-3a.   In  Figure 8-3b  we  show  the  corresponding profiles  of  d2q/dz2  and
d26/dz2.   In  this idealized  example,  the product of these  derivatives has a
large negative value at the top of the mixed layer, i.e.,
          ()() <« o at z = z2.                                   (8-54)
           dz2  dz2

     We  can  estimate the  derivatives  of  a  given parameter  £ measured  at
discrete points  in  space by representing the parameter values measured in the
vicinity of  the point of  interest  by a polynomial.  Suppose that  we want an
estimate of  d2£/dz2  at  the point.  z=z"  but that £ is  known  only at discrete
points Zi, z2,  ...  Zj that are not necessarily equally spaced.   Let us denote
the £ values at these points by
          C1 =£(xm, z.,t0)  , i=l,2,...I                               (8-55)

where we  assume  that £ is a parameter measured at rawin station m at time to.
We can  estimate the  second derivative  of £ as  well  as  other properties of
interest  at  the  desired elevation z" by expanding £ in a polynomial about z".
Thus, let

          £(z) = a0 + axn + a2n2 + a3n,3                                 (8-56)

where
          n = z-z".                                                     (8-57)
                                    149

-------
          \q

          \
           \
           \
                  (a)
              Figure 8-3.   (a)  Idealized profiles  of mixing ratio
                               q  and  potential  temperature 9 in dry,
                               convective conditions.

                           (b)  Second derivatives  of the  profiles
                               illustrated in panel  a.



We can obtain the four constants a0,  ...  a3  in  (8-56)  from  four values of £

and  their   corresponding  measurement   locations   z..    The  most  accurate


                                    150

-------
 T-epresentation  is  obtained by  using  the four  successive measurements  of £,

 ;hown  in  Figure  8-4,  that straddle the  point  z".   Two  of these  are  from

 elevations  below  z" and two are from higher elevations.   For convenience, let

 us  denote these four points by  zlf  z2,  z3 and z4, as  indicated in the Figure;

 ind  let  the associated  £ measurements be  designated  £x  ...  £4.    In  this

 notation  we  have  from  (8-56)                                                              ijlj'
                                                                                          if"
                                                                                          ill
                                                                                          .(!••.«
           Figure 8-4.   Illustration  of the points (dots) at which
                         measurements  of £  are available;  and the point
                         z"  at which a measure of d2£/dz2  is desired.
                         Values  of  £ measured at the points z., i=l,...4
                         centered at z" are used to approximate £(z) in
                         a polynomial  about z".
          £i = a0 + ajHi + a2qf + a3nf
          •         •

                                                                         (8-58)
          •         *

          £4 = a0
where

          0,. = z.-z".                                                    (8-59)


Solving the  system of equations  (8-58) for the a's  is straightforward and we

obtai n


                                     151
                                                                                          I
                                                                                          H
                                                                                           t
                                                                                          i-('
                                                                                          iip

                                                                                          «!• (•

-------
     a  _  i
      2 "
(8-60)
        _
     31 '
                 (nf-ni)
                          -  (n2-ns)(ni-ni)
     A22 =
        = (Ci-CaXni-ni) -  (C2-Ca)(nf-ni)
     B2 = (Ca-C»)(ni-nl) -
(8-61)




(8-62)




(8-63)


(8-64)


(8-65)


(8-66)


(8-67)


(8-68)


(8-69)
The  coefficients  a0,  ...  a3 provide  the  following useful  properties  of £:
                  = a0
          32
 (8-70)
                                                                        (8-71)
             z=z'
                                    152

-------
                  = 2a2
              z=z
                                                    (8-72)
          923
                  = 6a<
              z=z
           z"+6z
           z"-6z
                                                    (8-73)
                   = 2(6z)a0 + f(6z)'
                                                    (8-74)
     Now  that we  have  formulated a  method  of estimating  the derivatives of
 ^arameters measured at discrete points, we can proceed to estimate T.-L.
     Let
                                                                      v
                                                                     ft
                                                                     ft
           7
           zz
                                                                        (8-76)
The steps for Stage ZQ are as follows:
     (1)  Applying  the procedure  outlined above  for  estimating derivatives.
          [specifically  (8-60)  -  (8-69)  and (8-72)]  to  the mixing ratio and
          potential temperature soundings qm(z,to) and 8m(z,to), respectively,
          compute
qZ2(xm,zk,t0)
ezz(xm,zk,t0)
                                          k = 1, ... 60
at rawin station m (=1 on the first pass through this stage) at  hour to, where

                                    153

-------
          ZL. = z+(O  + 25m + kAz                                       (8-77)
           x    t ~m
and       Az = 50 m.

    • (2)  Next form the products
               Pk = ^22(l^'Qzz(z^  '  k =  lj  ••'  60                      (8"78)
and from this find

              P  = max(-P. ).                                             (8-79)
                    k    K

This value  of P  pertains  to  the  site x  of  rawin station  m  and  to  hour to  of
the sounding.

     (3)  Next we estimate z2 to  be  (units of m MSL).
                    ,10) = F(q(xra,t0),  e(xffl,t0))
                                                                        (8-80)
                    = zt(xm) + 25 + 50k*
          where k* is the smallest integer for which
               Pk* = - P.                                                (8-81)
     (4)  We  also  need for use in  Eq.  8-34 an estimate of the  range ±6z2 of
          elevations in  which  the actual elevation 22  °f  the mixed  layer top
          is  likely to lie.
                                    154

-------
     We anticipate that  a measure  of 6z2  is  the width of the  interval
     centered at  z=zk*  in which P., has a  magnitude  of, say,  60% of  its
     peak value  .   Examination of the third order derivatives ..of q  and 0
     might' also  provide  a  useable measure of  6z2.    At  this   time,  no
     information is  available  on which to base a quantitative  rule  for
     estimating the  range of  z2  values.   Therefore,  we will assume  for
     now that

               6z2 = 100m (interim assumption)                      (8-82)

     and after we  have  gained  experience  with actual soundings, we will
     attempt to formulate an empirical rule for estimating  6z2.

(5)  Compute the lifting condensation  level (LCL) at  each surface weather
     station n=l,...N at  the hour to  of the upper air  observations used
     above in step 3  to  estimate z2.   The  elevation  of the LCL is  found
     first in pressure coordinates as  follows.
     Let qn  and  6n  be  the mixing ratio  (dimensionless)  and  potential
     temperature (°K), respectively, at surface weather station  n.
     These data  are  available from  Processor P3.    If  a  parcel of  air
     originally at ground level  in the vicinity of the station  is lifted
     without mixing with ambient air,  both the mixing ratio and  potential
     temperature will  be conserved.   Thus,  at  any  altitude  p(mb)  the
     vapor pressure in the air  parcel  will  be

                      Mn—-                                     (8-83a)
     (cf Eq.  3-2a),  and its temperature will be
                               155

-------
                                                             (8-83b)

(cf £q. 3-6).  The  elevation  p,c,  of the lifting  condensation  level
is defined  as the  altitude where  the parcel's vapor pressure e  is
the  saturation  vapor  pressure  e .   The latter  is a  function  of
temperature alone, namely

          es = eoexp[j^ - ^)]                               (8-83c)
                        o
where  eQ  = 40mb, TQ =  302°K, L  =  2500 joule g"1, and R=0.461  joule
g  °K  .   Hence,  p    is the solution of the equation
             P°,n
                                /    i     -i
                                  ^3U2 - T"                 (8'83d)
          0.622 + qn

where T is given by(8-83b).  Eq.  (8-83d) can be solved approximately
by substituting  successively  smaller values of p into the equation,
beginning with  the surface pressure;  and  considering  the solution
PLCL  to be the  Pressure at  which the  left  side of  (8-83d)  first
exceeds the right side.

Using   the   pressure-height   functions  p (z,t  )   available   from
processor PI,  convert p,£L  into elevation z.£,  (m  MSL)  as follows

          zLCL(xn,t0) = z*                                    (8-84)

where z* is the elevation for which

          p(xn,z*,t0) = PLCL(~n)to^                          (8-85)
                          156

-------
     The function on the left side of (8-85) can be obtained by applying
     an  inverse  r   weighting  interpolation  to  the  set  of  Pm(z,t0)
     profiles,  namely
                         M
                             1 v xjrWz.to)
          P(xn,z,t0)  =! - ; - -                    (8-86)
                                        "
     At the end of this  step we have values of ZLQL(to) at all  N surface
     weather stations.  The M rawin stations whose soundings we  are using
     to determine  z2  are  a subset of the N surface stations.
(6)  At this step we must  decide whether z2 is to be the elevation given
     by  (8-80)  or  the elevation  ZLCL given  by (8-84).   As we  noted
     earlier,  the decision rests solely on  whether  ovQSm.to)  ls  greater
     than or equal  to zero.   In particular

                              , to)  if CT(X,t0) = 0;
                                                                  (8-87)
                         zLCL(xm,t0)  (Eq. 8-84), otherwise.

     where
          zK.to)  = value  given by Eq. 8-80.                     (8-88)
     There are two situations here that  signal  the presence of an error
in our estimates  of z2  and/or z,/»i .  The  first is
          ffc(~m'to)  = ° 2nd z|_CL(Vto) 
-------
     and the second is

          ac(Vto) * ° ^ zLCL^m)to)  >[z2^m>to)  +  6z2J .         (8-90)
     The  first  condition  indicates  that  clouds  are not  forming  even
     though our estimates   of z,p,  and the mixed  layer depth  indicate
     that  they  should;  and  (8-90)  implies  the  opposite,  namely,  that
     clouds are  forming even  though our  estimates  indicate that  they
     should not.  If either  (8-89)  or (8-90)  is  true  at site  xm at hour t0
     this  should  be  recorded  for  output  from  Stage ZQ.    Frequent
     occurrences  of these conditions would  indicate  some  systematic error
     in the calculation procedures.

(7)  Next we compute z3.  As we noted earlier (see Eq.  8-15)

                      pz2(xm,t0) + 100   ,  if ac(xm,t0) =  0;
          Z3(xm,t0) = J                                            (8-91)
                       -zTCU(xm,t0)  ,   otherwise
     where Zj^,,   is  the  average elevation  (m MSL) of the tops of cumulus
     clouds, an input to P8 derived from satellite data.

(8)  From (8-11)  and (8-70)

               qc(xffl,t0) = q(xfn,z2,t0) = a0jq(z2,t0)                (8-92)
     where  aA    is the  coefficient a,,  of  the expansion of  q about  the
            o,q                       o
     point  z"=z2.   This   coefficient  is  found  from the mixing  ratio
     sounding and Eqs.  (8-60) - (8-69).
                               158

-------
(9)  From (8-18) and (8-70)

               qJXm.to) = qfem'Zs.to) = ao,q(l3'to)                (8"93)
     where  a    is  obtained as  in  step (8-8) except  the expansion  is
             °»M
     about the elevation z"=Z3.

(10) From (8-8) and (8-74) we have
          M3(xm,to) = Z*[Az ao>q(zk;t0)  + ^ (Az)3a2)q(zk,to)]      (8-94)

     where  k2  is the altitude  interval  given  by (8-77) that is nearest
     Z2(xfn,t0), i.e.,

          |22(xnj)t0) - (zt(xm) + 25 + k2Az)| = minimum              (8-95)
     and similarly k3  is the integer that minimizes
          UsC^.to) - Ut(xm) + 25 + k3Az)| = minimum;             (8-96)
     and Az= 50m  as  in (8-77).   The coefficients  aQ    and  a£   in  (8-94)
     are derived from the q sounding data using formulas  (8-60)  - (8-69).
(11) From (8-9)
                                                                   (8-97)
(12) Repeat steps 1-8 at rawin station m for the next observation  hour  tj.
     to    obtain    z2(xm,t1),    Z3(xm,t1),    q^.ti),     q^C^.tj),
       (xm,ti) and 3.  (In  general, ti = t0 + Atm,  where Atm  is
                               159

-------
     the   interval  between  observations  at  station  m;   so  we  should
     actually   write  t.   rather  than  ti   to   designate  the  second
   •  observation   time.   However,  this  distinction  is  not  important
     because in the analyses that follow, we treat the observations on a
     station- by- station  basis  and  interpolate  hourly  values  of  the
     desired quantities  at each site.)

(13)  Construct linear  functions of qc, q^ and 3 for use in integrating
     these values  with respect to time from t0 to ti.  That is

          lA.t) = qc(xm,to) + qc(t-t0)      1
                                    -to)        >t0 < t < tx      (8-98)
                                    3(t-t0) J
     where

          ^c = ^c^'1^  '  Ictem'^Kti-tor1                    (8-99)
     with similar expressions  for 6^ and  3  [see  (8-19b) and (8-23)].
(14) Repeat steps 1-10 above  for each  of the M rawin  stations,  and then
     repeat all  steps  for  each  observation  interval  in  the period  for
     which  the  regional  model   is to  be  operated.    The observation
     interval, is usually  not  the same  at each upper air station.  Figure
     8-5  illustrates  a  hypothetical   situation   in   which the model
  — simulation  period is  of  length T  beginning  at  hour t0  and  the
     stations make soundings at a variety of  intervals.
                               160

-------
Station m
Station 3
Station 2           '               '
                    t02            t12

Station 1           '          '
                    t              t                                  t
                     om             im  .                               2111
                              Model Simulation Period
                    to                                      t0+ T.
           Figure 8-5.  Illustration of possible relationships among
                        the intervals at which upper air soundings are
                        made at a set of rawin stations.
          At the  end  of the operations in Stage  ZQ  there should be values of
          z2, 6z2, 23,  qc,  q^, 3 and M3  for each station m=l,...M and for
          each  observation   interval   in   the  model  simulation  period  T.
          illustrated in Figure 8-5.
Stage PATH
     In Stage ZQ  we derived estimates of  the  parameters required to evaluate
the fixed point  time integrals that enter in Eqs. (8-45) and (8-49).  In this
stage we estimate the trajectories necessary to evaluate the path integrals #
that enter into these equations.
                                    161

-------

     We are still considering the time interval t0 < t < tx and we require the
backward trajectories  that  begin at each of the rawin stations at hour. ti and  "*
go  back in  time to .to.   That  is,  we need to  know the' location x(t;x .t^
during  the  interval  t0 < t <  tj. of the air parcel that arrives at station x^
at hour ti.  By definition

          x(ti;xm,ti) = xm                                             (8-100)
          ** ^ * * /N'fiI       /wifl
and by previous declaration (see Figure 8-2)

                                                                       (8-101)
     We  will  compute  the  trajectories using  the  horizontal  velocities v2u
measured   in  the  vicinity  of  z2.   These  velocities  control  the  rate  of
advection  of  the  mixed layer  height  (see Eq.  8-2);  but  the  effective path
along which  the surface heat  flux Q is determined is more  likely fixed  by the    \
vertically averaged  horizontal flow beneath z2.  In actuality  the temperature
of a vertical  column of air  of depth z2-z+ at XM at time ti  is  affected  by the
                                      *  t    ~m         *               J
surface heat flux  in a plume-shaped area whose width a  increases from zero  at
x  at t=tt to  a value of the order
~m       *•
           a  (x^) ~ (t!-t0)Av                                           (8-102)
at  the  upstream starting  point of  the trajectory that ends at x^  at ti.   In
(8-102) Av is  the  magnitude  of the vertically  integrated  horizontal  wind shear
in  the  mixed layer.   Since  we are representing  the  heating rate of the column
as  an  unknown function G  multiplied by the  surface  heat  flux variations along
the  trajectory between  x!  and  x.  we  can  assume that the  difference  in  the
                         ^MH      *iM
integrated heat flux along  the trajectory extracted from the winds v2n at the
level  z2   and  that along  the "correct" trajectory is  absorbed in the function
G.
                                     162

-------
     To  compute the  trajectory  xi to  x  we will  assume  that there exists  a
                                 ~m     ~m
 routine,  or stage, which  we will  call WV, which  returns  an estimate of the
 vertical  wind  speed  w  and  the  horizontal  wind  vector  v,,  at  any given
 space-time point (x,z,t) in the NEROS domain.  Thus, when we write w(x,z,t) or
 vH(x,z,t)  it will  be  understood  that these values  are  available from the
 routine  WV  which  we will not specify here.  (In the first  generation model we
 will employ  the scheme developed by Bullock (1983) in the role of  stage WV.)
 For  later reference let us signify  this in equation form:
          w(x,z,t)
                       from Stage WV                                    (8-103)

     The  trajectories  can  now  be generated using  the  following  recursive
 formula:
where At  is a  time step  of order 30  minutes.   Execution  of (8-104) is the
first step in the operation of Stage PATH, i.e.,

     (1)  Solve (8-104)  for  the trajectories x/tjx^.ti),  t0  < t < tj at each
          of the M upper air stations.
     In- the  next  steps we  use  these  trajectories  to  evaluate  the  path
integrals in (8-45) and (8-49).
                                    163

-------
(2)  Determine  the  variations  in w2,  a ,   and  Q  along  each  of the  M
     trajectories  generated in step  1 for  the  period  t0 <  t < tx  and
     express  the results in the following functional forms:
          <-!
        4 F§C
         "to   ^                 J=°
  t-
f
          to
     where
          CTcm(t) = ^(x^jx..^).!)                               (8-106)
          QBtt> = Q(x(t;xfl|ftl),t)                                 (8-107)
     where
                                 ,t1)].                           (8-108)
(3)  Now compute  the  following path integrals:
         ,  - -c      	       " jt0 l-^Cti-jAt)                 (8-109)
          to
            Qdt = XQin(tl) = AtCtrJAt)          .             (8-111)
          J = (t1-t0)/At                                         (8-112)
(4)  Repeat the  three  steps above for each of  the M rawin stations and
                               164

-------
          for each  of the  observation  intervals within the  model  simulation
          period  (see Figure 8-5).   At the end of Stage PATH, there should be
          values of  the  path integrals  TW, Ia and IQ (Eqs.  8-109 -  8-111)  for
          each  rawin station for each observation interval in  the  simulation
          period T.
Stage WEWC
     Here we  attempt  to solve (8-45) for the function G(xm;t!,to),  which will
provide  the  entrainment velocity  field  w (x,t) through  (8-39);  and  equation
(8-49) for wc(xm;ti,t0) which will provide the cumulus updraft speed  wc(x,t).

     (1)  Using  the  estimates (8-98)  of the temporal  variations in qc,  and
          3 at  each  upper air site x^  in  the  period t0 < t < tx,  and the
          surface  heat  flux  QCx^t)  in  this  period,  compute the  following
          integral:

                                J
                           = AtE[3 + o-^.t,
     (2)  Compute the parameter (see 8-43):

                                         qc(Xn,.'ti-JAt)a (x  tj-jAt)
                                                       -

where j(t!) is from Stage PATH, Eq. 8-110.
                                    165

-------
     In  Eq.  8-45,  AZ2 is a measure  of the change in  z2  between the starting
point x' and the end point x, of the trajectory that arrives at x  at time ti.
      ""ID                   "Til           .                        "Til
As we .noted  earlier,  we have an estimate of z2 at xm at ti but no measurement
                                              *    ~m     i
of z2 at x' at t0.
         *wm
          III

     Let us  assume that t0 is the initial instant of the time period in which
data for the regional model are required and that t0 is also an hour at which
rawin data are  routinely collected.   At this  initial  moment we must use some
objective analysis method  to  determine z2 in the model domain.  Subsequently,
we can  use  the  prognostic equation 8-2  to  obtain z2. Thus, to estimate z2 at
x^ at  time  t0,  we first  estimate  z2 at  each of the  m  rawin stations using
(8-87) (Stage ZQ), and we estimate the likely error bounds ±6z2(x|n,t0) on this
estimate  at  each   x^ (see  step 4  of  Stage  ZQ).   Next,  we  apply  the  r"
interpolation  formula to  obtain Z2(x^,t0).   To  do this  we must  take into
account  the  possibility  that  cumulus  clouds  are  present  between  rawin
stations.  In this instance the z2 estimates obtained at the station sites x
                                  *                                         ~m
will  not represent the lifting condensation level, which is the altitude of z2
wherever ac(x,t0)  $  0.  Thus,  we assign  Z2(xm,t0) values  according to the
following rule:
                                              '  1f  ac(*m'to)  = 0;       (8-115a)
                                                 ,  otherwise           (8-115b)
                                     166

-------
vhere
ZLCL  is  glven by (8~84)> Z2(x-j,t0)  is  given by (8-87) and  the summations in
(8-115a) are  over all  M rawin stations while  in (8-115b) they are over all N
surface weather stations.

     We apply  the same |r|   interpolation formula  to  estimate 6z2 at x'   At
all times  t  = tls  t2, etc.  after  t0,  we will have estimates  of z2(x,t) from
the prognostic equation 8-2  (output of  Stage  W2   described  below).   In this
case  z2(x||J,t) must  be  assumed  to be  exact (i.e., 6z2(x^,t)=0).  Errors  are
allowed  only  at  the  end  points  of  the time  intervals  that we  treat.   For
example, in  ti < t <_ t2, we  assume 6z2(t!)=0 but we  allow finite values of
6z2(t2) at each rawin station.

     Thus,  step 3 of this stage (WEWC) is as follows:

     (3)   a.  If t0  is  the  initial instant of  the regional model simulation
               period, determine Z2(xm,t0),m=l,. . .M from  (8-87)  (Stage ZQ) and
               z2(xi,to) from (8-115).  Then estimate 6z2(xm,t0),m=l,.. .M  (see
               step  4,  Stage ZQ) and   subsequently  6z2(xjJ1,t0)  using  these
               values and (8-115).
           b.  If t0  is  not  the initial  instant of the model  simulation,  then
                         is   available  at  all  grid points  x  from  Stage  Z2,
               described below; and 6z2(x|j1,to) = 0 everywhere.
     (4)       We  can  now  estimate  the range  of values  (8-44) in which  the
               parameter  AZ2  that enters  in  (8-45)  lies.   Recall from  (8-34)

                                     167

-------
         that AZ2 is the difference in  the z2 values measured at
         and (x_,ti).  We find after some thought that
                                6z2(x;,to>]                      (8-117)
                                                                (8-118)

(5)       We  now solve (8-45)  for  the minimum and  maximum  values  of G
          (see  8-46)  in  the vicinity of x  during the interval t0 < t <
                   ^ Ifl.(ti) or q^x^) = 0 and IQm ^ 0;
                     .t^rtn - I^CtO* ^ClQ.Cti) -             (8-119)
                                         c
                   I(xm;t1,to)/qc(xin;t1,t0)3"1, if
                  W*^ aafi W an- iQm ^ o;

                 1f Vtl} - °'
                W1'th "*<*M    rePlaced ^ ^(x.t,)-    (8-120)
          In Eq.  (8-119), AZ2(  )m1n is from (8-117), AZ2( )max  is  from
          (8-118),  I^tti)  is  from  (8-109),  T^Cti)  is  from  (8-111),
          Jcm(t1)  is from (8-110),  I(  )  is  from (8-113),  qc( )  is  from
          (8-114),  and A  is given by (8-30).
                              168

-------
(6)       Next  we must  check  whether  the  upper bound  G__v  on G  is
                                                            lUoX


          positive.   If it  is  not,  we must return to  Stage ZQ and alter



          the value of q   and,  if necessary,  the other parameters listed



          •in (8-47) until the  resulting integrals I,  qc,  etc.  in (8-120)



          yield a value for G_,v  that is positive, and preferably of an
                             ilicLX


          order of magnitude consistent with (8-40).   Tne  procedure  for



          altering the  variables  in  (8-47)  must  be developed  through



          experimentation  (refer  again  to  the  paragraphs   preceding



          (8-47))  and  therefore we will  not attempt to define  it here.



          Thus, if G(x_,t1)_,v  > 0,  go to  step 7; otherwise  return  to
                     /VHI     IHQ.X


          Stage ZQ and begin modification of q ,  etc.  as described above.







(7)       We can  arrive  at  this  step only  after the previous  analyses



          have produced a range of  G values that lies at least partially



          on the positive,  real  axis.   We assume, therefore, that





               Go  < G(xm,t1) <  G(xm,tl)max                        (8-121)





          where





               Go  = -axCO.GCx)].                            (8-122)
          We now compute  limiting values for the  cloud updraft velocity



          parameter w .
                     °ml     • 1f    ^





                  1f      '^
                               169

-------
          where
                              - M3(.xm,t0)
                    ti-jAt)[3
                    qc(xm.t1-jAt)ac(xm.t1-jAt)
                                  - 3] }           (8-124)
          In this expression M3 is from (8-94); z3 is from (8-91); 3,
          qc,  and q^ are from  (8-98); w(x,z,t)  is  the vertical  velocity
          function  solution  or  stage WV  defined  earlier just  before
          (8-103);  and  z^  is  defined  by   (8-108)  with  a  similar
          definition for z .m.
                         am
               "ctem'tiW = EP-  (8-123) with GO replaced by
                c ~m    max                                       (8-125)
(8)       If  wc^'tl^max  -   °   and  Iom^tl^   —  qc^m;tl
          then return to  Stage  ZQ  and  alter q^  and,  if necessary, the
          other parameters  in  list (8-51)   until  Eq.   (8-125)  yields a
          positive value  for w rC^^i^ax-   The  alteration process  is
          similar  to  that  discussed  earlier  in  connection  with the
          calculation of G (see the paragraph preceding (8-51) and step 6
          above.   When a  range w  ( ) .   < w  <  w ( )    has been  found
                                 C   ml n —   C ""   C   mOlX
          that lies at least partially on the positive  real  axis, proceed
          to step 9.

                               170

-------
(9)       At  this  point  a  range  of  values  of  G(x m,ti)  has  been

          established (in step 7, Eqs; 8-121  and 8-122);  and a range of

                    has  been computed in steps 7  and 8, namely
          where the upper  bound is positive.  We  now select from these
                                                      •
          ranges  the following values for site xm  for the interval t0 to
          ti:
               G(x_,ti) =  value  in the range  (8-121) that
                 ~m       satisfies  (8-40) closest;               (8-127)
              w (x.ti) =  solution of  (8-49) with G
                c ~n     .  given by (8-127) and all               (8-128)
                           other parameters with values
                           determined in step 8.
         We  assume  that these  values are  constant  at x   during the
                                                          ~in

         entire  interval  t0  <  t  <  tlf  specifically, we  assume


               G(x,t) =  G(x,t1)   1
                 ~"        "*           to  <  t  <  tl                (8-129)
               wc^m,t) = w^x^.tj J


         These values  should be recorded  for  each  hour in the  interval

         t0  to ti for site  x.   Note that tlt  which  is the  hour of the              i
                             ~m                                                      j

         rawin observation  following that at  t0, is  not necessarily the

         same  hour  for all   rawin  stations.  (See Figure 8-5).  This does

         not pose a problem because  we  apply  (8-129)  to each  station

         separately  to obtain  hourly estimates of G and WG.

                               171                                                  ] |
                                                                                    i :
                                                                                    i 'I-

-------
     (10)      Repeat step 9 for each interval  in  the model  simulation period.
               This  will produce hourly values  of G and w  at rawin station m
               throughout the simulation period to to to + T.

     (11)      Repeat steps  1-10  for each  rawin  station  m=l,...M.  At  the
               conclusion of Stage WEWC,  there  will be hourly values of G and
               w  at  every  rawin station  throughout the  simulation  period.
Stage W2
     We now begin  to  assemble  the information gathered in the previous stages
to  solve  the  prognostic  equation (8-2)  for z2  over  the model  space-time
domain.  First, we construct the entrainment velocity field.

     (1)  Starting at the initial instant t0 of the simulation period, collect
          the G values  at this hour generated in  Stage  WEWC at each of the M
          rawin stations  and interpolate  them onto the  NEROS  grid using the
           .1
          r   weight:
           M
           I
            -•
G(x,t0) =     -                           (8-130)
                          I |x-xj   G(x.to)
                            ' -- ffl     ~flr u
          where x ranges over all grid points.

     (2)  Convert the G field into the wg field as follows (see 8-39):

               wp(x,to) = G(x,t0)Q(x,t0) (=f6/A0)                       (8-131)
                                    172

-------
     where Q is the  surface  heat flux in the  grid  cell  centered at x at
     time t0.  Note  that wfi(x,t)  (designated f6/A9 in Part  1),  t0  < t <
     t0 + T is an output of this  processor,  P8,  for each grid  point in
     the regional  model  domain.

(3)  We construct  the  initial  12  field at  each  grid  point using  the
     interpolation  scheme  (8-115)  employed  earlier   in  Stage  PATH.
     Specifically,
                      f  Eq.  8-115a,  if or(x,t0) = 0;
          Z2(x,t0) =  |                  c                        (8-132)
                      |_  Eq.  8-115b,  otherwise
     where x ranges over all  grid points in  the model  region.

(4)  Interpolation of  the  cloud updraft velocities WG estimated at the
     rawin stations in Stage WEWC  requires  caution because  it may  often
     happen that cumulus clouds  are present  in isolated  areas that do not
     contain an  upper air station,  or are present at  station  locations
     between observation times.   To handle these  situations we propose to
     compile a semi -empirical   relationship  between WG  and  cloud  depth
     using all  wc,  22  and Z-J-QJ estimated in the earlier analyses during
     the simulation period T.   This  function can be based on field  data.
     For now compute  the  average of the WG  values obtained in Stage WEWC
     for various values of the  cloud thickness h3 = ZJQJ - z2, say values
     of hs at  intervals  of 200m; and call the resulting function W(h3).
     Then we assume
                   = (l-a(x)MzTCU(x,t0)-z2(x,to))
                                                                  (8-133)
                               173

-------
     where
         W(hs) =  w  for  clouds of depth h3  (an empirical         (8-134)
                     function);

         a(x) = distance weighting  function
                                                                 (8-135)
              = exp[-|x-xJ/SIG]
     x, is  the rawin  site  closest  to x where w,. ?  0;  SIG is a distance
     ~ni                               "*        c
     constant, e.  g. ,  50km;  and

         "cLOCAL(*>to) = "A'^'                              <8'136)
     Formula (8-133) is  an  heuristic expression  that assigns w  a  value
     that is determined partly by any wc estimates that have  been derived
     for that location  in  the earlier stages  and partly by the assumed
     empirical  relationship between  cloud  depth and  updraft  velocity.

     Note that wc(x,t),  with x ranging over  all  grid  points and t over
     all  hours   in  the   simulation  period  T,   is an  output  of  this
     processor,  P8.      .   .

(5)  For the advection velocity field v^  required  in  Eq.  (8-2)  at time
     t0, we will  use
                    = [Z2(x,t0)-zt(x)]"1   vH(x,z,t0)dz           (8-137)
     where v(x,z,t) is the horizontal wind at level z from the routine WV
     described  earlier.   The  horizontal  velocities  that  WV  provides
                               174

-------
     should  be  those  that are  used  to  compute  the vertical  velocity
     w(x,z,t) and  they should be interpolated from the  wind observation
     stations to  each grid point  x using  an interpolation  scheme  that
     maintains  a  consistent  relationship   between   w(x,z,t)  and  the
     horizontal  winds v-Xx.z'.t) at elevations z.  < z'< z.
                      ~n ~                     t •—  —

(6)  The vertical  air speed at each grid point x at the initial moment t0
     is obtained from the function routine WV as before,  namely
                                  to)                             (8-138)
     where the function on the right side is a part of routine WV.

(7)  We  now  solve  (8-2)  for z2(x,t0+At)  using  the difference  scheme
     described in Appendix A  to  Processor P7.  With  this  scheme  we have
                              AtS(x;to)]dx'
     where
          S(x',to) = [W2(xjto)-o (xjto)w (xjto)]-
                               L       c                          (8-140)
                         (l-ac(x',t0)) + we(x',t0)
     where a (x,t0) is the known fractional coverage of cumulus clouds at
     time t0  in the  grid cell centered  at  x;w2 is from  (8-138);  WG is
     from (8-133); WQ is from (8-131); and
                    €
          p(x,t|x',t') = known function of v2H- (see Chapter 9, Part 1)
                                                                  (8-141)
                               175

-------
                             *                                                 .*
     (8)  At  this  point  we have  computed  z2(x,t0+At).   From  this  field we*
          construct z3 in the manner of (8-91), namely
          Z3(x,t0+At) =
                              Z2(x,t0+At) + 100, if ac(x,t0*At) = 0;
                              zTn,(x,to+At), otherwise
                                                   (8-142)
                                                        -)
          where Zypy is the known elevation of cumulus tops.  This calculation j
          should be  performed at  all  grid points x  and the results retained
          for output from P8.

     (9)  The  material  surface  flux H3 across surface H3 must be computed at  f'
          each grid point at time t0 + At as follows:
               H3(x,t0+At) = Z3(x,t0+At)
                            • -W(x,z3(x,t0+At),t0+At)
                                                   (8-143)  3
where
Z3(x,t0+At) =
                                           At)-z3(x,t0)
                                           At
          and
                                 = v(x,z3(x,t0+At),t0-HAt)
                          calculated from Vs.. and z3  in  the
                          manner of (8-A2). "See the  Appendix
                          to this section.
                                                                        (8-144)
                                                    (8-145)   f
                                                    (8-146)
                                                               .-ft
          In (8-143),  w(  ) denotes the function  routine  WV.   The same applies
          to v( ) in (8-145).  The flux H3  is  an  output of processor P8 but it
          is not used  in the calculations performed  within this processor.   At
          the initial  moment t0, assume
                                    176

-------
          H3(x,t0) = H3(x,t0+At)                                  (8-147)

(10) We must also  output the local time derivative z2 at each grid point
     and each hour:
                                    - Z2(x,t0)
          Z2(x,t0+At) =	 .                   (8-148)
     assume
          Z2(x,t0) - Z2(x,t0+At).                                  (8-149)
     These fields are outputs of P8 at each hour.

(11) Compute the thickness  of Layer 3 at each  grid point at time t0+At:
          h3(x,t0+At) = Z3(x,t0+At) -Z2(x,t0+At)                  (8-150)
     where z3 is  from (8-142) and z2  is  from  (8-139).   Evaluate (8-150)
     for output only when t0+At is an integral  number of hours.

(12) Compute the thickness of Layer 2 for output:
          h2(x,t0+At) = Z2(x,t0+At) - ZT(X) - h^x.to+At)         (8-151)
      \
     where z2 is  from (8-139) and ZT  and hj are inputs to Processor P8.
     Compute (8-151) only at integral hours.

(13) Compute the elevation of surface z3  in pressure coordinates.
          P3(x,t0+At) = p(x,z3(x,to+At),t0+At)                    (8-152)
                               177

-------
     where p(x,z,t), which  is  given by  (8-86),  is the pressure (mb)  at
     elevation z  (m  MSL)  over site  x  at  hour  t.   This  function  is
     interpolated  from  the pressure-height  functions Pm(x,t)  that are
     inputs  from  Processor  PI.   The   field  p3  is  an  output  of  this
     processor,  P8,  at  each grid point  and hour.

(14) Compute the elevation of surface z2  in pressure coordinates:
          P2(x,t0+At) = p(x,z2(x,t0+At),t0+At)                    (8-153)
     where  p is  given by  (8-86).   The  field  p2  is  an  output of  this
     processor at  each  hour of  the  simulation period.

(15) In  Part 1,  Eq.  5-44, we  defined  the function Y(x,t)  to be the
     fraction of the volume flux entering cumulus clouds  in the grid cell
     centered at x at time t that originates  in Layer 0.   Here we compute
     an interim estimate .¥' of  this parameter based strictly on heuristic
     notions.  In  Processor P12 we  test whether  the V  values derived
     here  satisfy  criterion   (5-47)   of  Part  1.    If  they  meet  this
     condition  they  become the  final  estimate  of the  parameter  V.
     Otherwise ¥(x,t)  is  given the largest value  that satisfies (5-47).
     As a rough, heuristic approximation we shall assume
f
[-
                                   2h3(x,t0+At)
          r (x,t0+At) = 0.5 exp  -[22(x,to+At)-ZT(x) 3   + "
     Under  this  assumption,  V  •*  0.1  as  the depth  of  cumulus  clouds
     becomes large  compared  to  the depth (z2-z-j.)  of the subcloud layer.
     For  shallow  cumulus,  V  •»  0.6.   The  V   field  is  an  output of
     Processor P8 each hour.
                               178

-------
Stage WV
     This stage  is in  effect  a function  routine that  provides  vertical  and
horizontal  wind  speeds  at  any  grid  cell   and elevation,- and  horizontal
divergence between any two surfaces in any grid cell.

     As  with nearly  all  of  the  input parameters  required in  the  regional
model,  the  variables  just cited  can  be  estimated by  a number  of  methods.
Solutions of the omega equation, isentropic analyses, and  differentiation of
functions fit to wind data are several approaches.  Our intent here is not to
prescribe the use  of  one  particular technique  but  rather to specify  which
quantities are required for subsequent use in this and other processors in the
network, and  in  the regional  model itself.  Selection of specific techniques
is left  to  the  "user".  Indeed, one  of the  reasons for structuring the model
system  in a  modular  form  was  to facilitate  the  use of  various techniques
interchangeably.    In  the  "first  generation"  processor network  we  plan  to
employ in this stage, WV,  the method developed by Bullock (1983).

     In  order to insure compatibility  between  the  horizontal  divergences <6>
required in  Processor Pll and the vertical velocities w  required in this and
other processors,  it  is advantageous, to compute  all  these  fields in this one
stage.  Following is a list of the divergences that must be computed each hour
for output to Processor Pll:

                                P3(x,y,t)
          <«3 =         f(YH-v)dp                              (8-155)
                                    179

-------
        <6(x,y,t)>2 =
                                 P2(x,y,t)
                                            ,   if
                                 Pvs(x,y,t)
                                 P2(x,y,t)
                                           >   if
                                                                      (8-156)
                                 PjCx.y.t)
          <5(x,y,t)>1 - p .*    j  (VH-v)dp   ,   defined only when Apx=0  (8_157)
                                 Pvs(x,y,t)
Since  the  input  wind data  are  in  z  coordinates,  it will  be  necessary  to
convert them  to p coordinates  using  the function p (z,t) available from  PI.
Note also  that since Pj^o.  P^^i  or  PVS*  and pl0 and  the reciprocals
of  the  pressure  differences  that  appear outside  these  integrals  are  also
negative.   The net result is that <6> has the same sign as V.,*v.   We leave the
method of computing the divergences  (£H*v) to the user.
     The layer  averaged divergences  <6>   given by  (8-155,  156  and 157) are
related to  the vertical  velocity wn on  the pressure surfaces  pn that bound
each layer by (see Eqs. 11-Ib and 11-40)
                                    180

-------
                      = ^- [Qn(x,y,t) - tt^Cx.y.t)]                  (8-158)
                         ^
where
          Apn =   iPn0^'^ " Pn-i^^'^l                             (8"159)
and  uin  denotes  the  vertical  velocity  in  pressure  coordinates  (mb  sec  )
averaged over the.surface p  within the grid cell centered at (x,y).   We shall
assume that the spatial variations in u> have such large scales that

          u>n(x,y,t) - wn(x,y,t)                                        (8-160)

where  u>n denotes  the local  value  of tu  on  pressure  surface  p  at  the  cell
center (x,y).
     By definition

          » 5 If + W

where p  is pressure  and w  is  the vertical velocity in z  coordinates  at the
point where  p is  measured.   Making use of  the  hydrostatic approximation and
(8-161), we can write
Two  of  the fields  that we  need  in this  processor,  P8,  are  w. and  w*,  the
vertical velocities in z coordinates (m sec  ) on the top surfaces of Layers 3
and 2.  Eqs. (8-158), (8-160), and (8-162) provide a means of estimating these
velocities  in  terms of  the measured  horizontal  winds  and  their divergence.
                                    181

-------
     We must distinguish  between  the two cases Ap^=l  and Ap,=0.   Recall from
(7-98)  that Ap,(t)=l  if a  surface  inversion  is  present over  the modeling
region at time  t and it  is zero  otherwise.   When an inversion is present the
effective' ground surface  for the  flow  aloft  is  the "virtual  surface"  p
defined as the top of the inversion layer.

     Mode 0:  Ap  = 0.
     In  this case  the  virtual  surface coincides  with the  terrain.    Using
(8-158) and (8-159) we can express u3 in the form
                                           + u)Q                        (8-163)
where WQ is the value of tu at ground level.

     To  estimate u>0 we  note first  that the  vertical  velocity w   at ground
level is
          wrt & v •VMZ.,.                                                 (8-164)
           0   ~o ~H T                                                 v      '
where z-p is the terrain height and v  is the horizontal wind velocity  near  the
ground.   Since horizontal gradients in terrain level are generally much larger
than those  of the synoptic  scale pressure field p  , we  expect that  the last
term on  the  right side of (8-162) will  have a much larger magnitude  than  the
term involving Vu*PQ-  We also expect the  last term to  exceed  the magnitude of
the  local  time  rate  of change  of  pQ.    Thus,  to good  approximation we  can
assume
                                                                        (8"165)
                                     182

-------
Combining (8-162), (8-163), and (8-165) we have

          wi * TTT; C~af "*" Xq'SwPq ~ Ap.<6>, - AF
           o   p^cj   ot   ~o ~n J     o   o
                        ••• P.gv_'VuzT],    mode 0.                      (8-166)
where

          AP-L =  jp^x.y.t) - pvs(x,y,t)| ,    mode 0.                (8-166a)

We  assume  the  velocity and  divergence  fields  required  to  evaluate  this
equation  have been  extracted  from the  wind data  that  are  inputs  to this
processor.  The  pressure surfaces p  are specified  by  those stages within P8
that call stage WV for u> estimates.

     To estimate the densities p, and p  , we use
                    Pn(x,t)
where R is the gas constant and T  is the temperature at pressure level p  and
grid  point  x  =  (x,y).   The  temperature  fields will  be  an  input  to  this
processor.   To evaluate  VHP3 and V^Zj in Eq. (8-166), it will be necessary to
fit a polynominal of at least 3-rd order to the pressure anditerrain data (see
Appendix to  this chapter).

     The  expression  for Wg  is obtained  in the  same  manner that (8-166) was
derived.  We get                                                        i
                                     183

-------
          W2 =
                                                                       (8-168)
               '* pogWT]'   mode °

     Also  in  mode  0 we  require  for  direct  use  in  the  regional model  the
component of the  vertical  velocity w^ on surface p,  that is due to horizontal
divergence of the  flow  in Layer I (see  Eq.  3.1b of Part 1).  We  denote  this
velocity component by WQ,  where
          wl = WT1 + "Dl = pTg caT
                                                                       (8-169)
Since  by definition  WQ.^  is  the  divergence induced  vertical  motion on  p,,
the terrain  induced  component is just the right  side  of (8-169) with <6>,=0.
Thus ,
                  ^PT
          wAi = ' 7TZ <6>i  « mode °-                                  (8-170)
and Ap,  is  given by (8-166a).  In order  to emphasize that this value applies
in mode  0  only,  we designate it W.U at the output of Pll.  Processor P12 will
take this field as input and generate the final, complete function WD,
                                    184

-------
     Mode 1:  Ap, = 1
     In  this  state  an  inversion  layer is  present  at  the  ground and  the
 effective bottom of the flow aloft is the virtual surface p  ,  which coincides
 vith  terrain features that  extend  up through  the inversion  layer  but  which
 otherwise  is the top  of  the  inversion  layer itself.  In  this  situation  the
 3xpression for u>3 becomes

          u)3 = Ap3<6>3 + Ap2<6>2 + u)vg.                                 (8-171)
 In order  to  obtain  an estimate of w   that  is  consistent with the model  used
 in  P7 to  simulate  flow  in the  ground  level inversion,  we must  impose  the
 constraint that the volume flux across p   is continuous.
     Just  below the top z    of the cold inversion layer  the  downward volume
flux is
          3
where  (%»v0twQ)  is  tne  fluid  velocity in  the cold  layer;  and nvs  1S tne
cooling  rate,  a known function  of  space and time.  Just  above  zvs>  i.e., at
the base of Layer 2, the downward volume flux is
     dt
Continuity of  the flux across Hys requires that (8-172) and (8-173) be equal,
which is true  if
                                    185

-------
               Ji *y         5^7         5^7
               aT*  + "vs-aT  * vvs^    '  -W
If we assume that  the spatial gradients in z   are  also much larger than those
in the synoptic pressure field, we can make use of  the earlier approximation
(8-165) to obtain
          "Vs '  'Pvs^vs                                              (8'175)
where wys is given  by  (8-174).
     Combining (8-162),  (8-171), (8-174), and (8-175) we get
W  =     C    *
           3 = pTg C§r * W3 ' Ap3<6>3 *
                 P7  C-5T ^vs'Vvs - nv$L  n°del               (8-176)
and similarly
          «, = -i- c^
           2   p-g L at
                                                                      (8-177)
In both (8-176) and (8-177)
          Ap2 = |p2(x,y,t) -  pvs(x,y,t)  | ,  mode 1                    (8-178)
In mode 1  no estimate  of w  at the top  of layer 1 is required because in this
situation the volume flux is  given by n  s-
                                    186

-------
     The input  requirements and  outputs  of Stage WV are  summarized  in Table
8-1.     Figure   8-6   illustrates   processor  P8   and  its   data   interfaces
schematically.
                                    187

-------
               Table 8-1.   Summary of the  input  and  output  requirements
                           of each stage of Processor  P8.
Input
Variable
q (z,t)
Description
mixing ratio at
Source
PI
Stage
ZQ
Output
Variable
z2(x ,t)
Description
elevation (m MSL)
Qn(t)
en(t)
oc(x,t)
             elevation z (m MSL)
             at hour t over rawin
             station m.
             potential temperature
             (°K) at elevation z
             (m MSL) at hour t over
             rawin station m.
                       PI
             mean terrain ele-
             vation (m MSL) in
             grid cell centered
             at x .
                       P7
mixing ratio (dimension- P3
less) at surface weather
station n at time t.
potential temperature  P3
(°K) at surface weather
station n at time t.

pressure (mb) at       PI
elevation z(m MSL)
at time t over
rawin station m.
fraction of sky       RAW
covered by cumulus
clouds in grid cell
centered at x at
time t.     ~
of top surface of
model layer 2 over
rawin site x  at time
t of rawin soundings.

expected range of
values, centered at z2
at which actual mixed
layer top lies over
rawin site x  at
times t of rawin
soundings.

elevation (m MSL) of
top surface of model
Layer 3 over rawin
station m at times t
of rawin soundings.

estimated water mixing
ratio entering cumulus
clouds over rawin
station m at time t
(available at 30 mi nut
intervals).
estimated  water
mixing  ratio  above
Layer 3 at rawin
station m at  time t
(available at 30
minute  intervals).

vertically integrated
water mixing  ratio  in
Layer 3 over  rawin
site m  (units=m,  see
Eq.  8-20) at  times  t
of rawin soundings.
                                        188

-------
                                 Table 8-1.  (continued)
Input
Variable
                  Description
                                            Output
                        Source    Stage     Variable
                            Description
zTCU(x,t)
             elevation (m MSL)
             of highest cumulus
             cloud tops in grid
             cell centered at x
             at time t.       ~
                      RAW
  ZQ,      3   average mixing ratio
(Cont.)      ~         in Layer 3 over rawin
                       site m at time t
                       (available at 30 min.
                       intervals).

          z, p,(x  t)   elevation (m MSL) of
           LLL ~n'     the lifting condensa-
                       tion level over sur-
                       face station n at
                       time t (required
                       only at the hours
                       t of rawin  observa-
                       tions)
vH(x,z,t)
w(x,z,t)
Q(x,t)
a (x,t)
   ~
horizontal wind       Stage
vector (m/sec)         WV
at site x, ele-
vation z (m MSL)
at time t.

vertical air speed    Stage
(m/sec) at site        WV
x, elevation z (m
MSL) at time t.
             surface kinematic  j.   P4
             heat flux (m°K sec" )
             in cell at x at time
                        *w
             t.
             fraction of sky        RAW
             covered by cumulus
             clouds in grid cell
             centered at x at
             time t.     ~

             elevation of top      Stage
             surface of Layer 2     ZQ
             at rawin  station m.
                                             PATH
                       path integral  of w
                       leading to rawin
                       site m at time t
                       (see 8-109) units
                       = m.

                       path integral  of
                       cumulus cloud cover
                       fraction leading to
                       rawin  site m at hour
                       t (see 8-110) units =
                       sec.

                       path integral of
                       kinematic surface
                       heat flux leading
                       to site x  at time t
                       (see 8-111) units =
                       m °K.
                                         189

-------
                                  Table 8-1.   (continued)

Input                                                  Output
Variable        Description        Source    Stage      Variable        Description
       )>3   average mixing ratio  Stage     WEWC      G(x ,t)       entrainment veloc
             in Layer 3 over        ZQ                              scale factor (uni
             rawin  station m at                                    °K~1) (see 8-39)
             time t (available at                                   rawin  site x  at
             30 min. intervals).                                     hourly intervals

q (x ,t)     mixing ratio          Stage               wc^m'^     cumulus updraft
             entering cumulus       ZQ                              velocity scale (m,
             clouds over site                                   '    sec) at rawin
             x  at time t                                           site x  at hourly
             TSvaiTable at 30 min.                                   intervals t.
             intervals).

Q(x,t)       surface kinematic      P4
             heat flux (m °K
             sec- ) in grid
             cell at x at time t
             (at hourTy intervals).

o\.(x,t)      fractional coverage   RAW
   ~         of cumulus clouds

             cumulus cover path    Stage
             integral              PATH

       )     elevation of top      Stage
             surface of Layer 2    ZQ
             at rawin  site x^
             at times t of
             rawind soundings.

       ,t)   lifting condensation  Stage
             level at surface       ZQ
             weather station n
             at times t of rawin
             soundings.

             w path integral       Stage
             leading to rawind     PATH
             site ><  at time t
             of rawrn  sounding

^nn/t)       surface heat flux     Stage
 ^m          path integral         PATH
             leading to site
             >c  at  hour t of
             rawin  sounding.
                                         190

-------
                                 Table 8-1.  (continued)
Input
Variable
M'V
Description
vertically inte-
grated water mixing
ratio in Layer 3
over rawin site x
(at sounding hours t
only).
Source
Stage
ZQ
Output
Stage Variable
WEWC
(Cont. )
Description

            vertical air speed    Stage
            (m/sec) at (x,z,t)     WV

            water mixing ratio    Stage
            above Layer 3 at       ZQ
            rawin site x_ (at
            t = 30 nrin Tfltervals).

            elevation of top of   Stage
            Layer 3 at rawin       ZQ
            station m at sounding
            times t.

            expected range of     Stage
            z2 at rawin site       ZQ
            x_ at observation
            KSur t.
TCU
,t)      hourly values of      Stage
         the entrainment       WEWC
         velocity scale factor
         at rawin site x .
                       ~m
 ,t)     hourly values of      Stage
         the cumulus updraft   WEWC
         speed (m/sec) at
         site x .

(x,t)    cumulus top           RAW
         elevation at hour t
         in grid cell
         centered at x.
            estimated top of      Stage
            Layer 2 at rawin       ZQ
            site x  at sounding
            time t1!1
                                             W2
w (x,t) =    entrainment velocity
fe/A8(x,t)   at hour t at grid cell
             centered at x (m/sec).
wr(x,t)      cumulus updraft speed
 " ~         (m/sec) at hour tin
             grid cell centered at
             x.

wz(x,t)      vertical air speed
             (m/sec) on surface
             H2 at grid cell
             centered at x at hour
             t.

Z2(x,,t)      elevation (m MSL) of
   ~         surface H£ (top of
             Layer 2) in grid cell
             centered at x at hour
             t.
                                       191

-------
                                  Table 8-1.  (continued)
Input
Variable
zt(x)
Description
mean terrain
elevation (m MSL)
in grid cell
centered at x.
/w
Source Stage
P7 W2
(Cont. )
Output
Variable
z3(x,t)
Description
elevation (m MSL)
surface HS (top o
Layer 3) in grid <
centered at x at t
t.
w(X,Z,t)
Pm(z,t)
hi(x,t)
horizontal wind       Stage
vector (m/sec)         WV
at site x, elevation
z, time t.

vertical air speed    Stage
(m/sec) at site        WV
x, elevation z (MSL)
at time t.
pressure (mb) at
elevation z (m MSL)
at hour t over rawin
station m.
PI
depth (m) of Layer 1   P7
in grid cell centered
at x at time t.
Ha(x,t)      volume flux (m/sec
             through top surfac
             Layer 3 in grid ce
             at x at hour t.
                *%*

Z2(x,t)      local time derivat
             of elevation 7.2
             (m/sec) at grid
             cell centered at x
             at hour t.

ns(x,t)      thickness (m) of
             Layer 3 at hour t
             in grid cell center
             at x.
                                thickness (m) of La
                                2 at hour t in gric
                                cell centered at x.
                                                       Ps(x.t)      pressure (mb) at
                                                                    elevation of top
                                                                    of Layer 3 at hour
                                                                    t in grid cell
                                                                    centered at x.

                                                       P2(x,t)      pressure (mb) at
                                                                    elevation of top  of
                                                                    Layer 2 at hour t
                                                                    in grid cell center
                                                                    at x.
                                                                       *%«

                                                       ¥'(x,t)      interim estimate  of
                                                                    the cumulus flux
                                                                    partition function
                                                                    (see Eq. 5-44 of
                                                                    Part 1) at hour t
                                                                    in grid cell at x
                                                                    (non-dimensionalT
                                        192

-------
                                  Table 8-1.  (continued)
Input
Variable
v«>
Description
terrain elevation
Source
P7
Stage
WV
Output
Variable
vH(x,z,t)
Description
horizontal wind
O.Cz.t)
On(t)
Ap-^t)
             centered at x.
observed east-west     PI
wind component (m/
sec) at elevation
z (m MSL) at observa-
tion hour t at rawind
station m.

same as u  except      PI
north-south wind
component
observed east-west     P3
wind component (m/
sec) at observa-
tion hour t at sur-
face weather station
n.

same as u (t) except   P3
north-south wind
component.

surface inversion      P7
indicator (see 7-98).

elevation (m MSL) at   PI
pressure level p (mb)
at rawin  station m
at hour t.

elevation in pres-     Stage
sure coordinates (mb)  W2
of top surface of
Layer 3 in grid cell
at x at time t.
w(x,z,t)
                                                       Wrj-,(x,t)
<5(x,t)>3
   ~
2
<6(x,t)>1
             [VH=(U,V)]  at (arbitrary
             eTevation z (m MSL),
             time  t at site x.

             vertical  air speed
             (m/sec) at  (arbitrary)
             elevation z (m MSL)
             at time t at site  x.
             divergence induced
             vertical  air speed
             (m/sec)  on top  surface
             of Layer 1 (Defined
             for daytime hours  only. )

             average  horizontal wind
             divergence (sec-1) in
             Layer 3  in grid cell
             centered at (x) at
             hour t.       ~

             same as  <6>, except
             applies  to Layer 2.

             Same as  <6>3 except
             applies  to Layer 1
             (values  of this
             quantity are computed
             only for daytime hours.)
                                                                    same as <5>  except
                                                                    applies to Layer 2.
                                                                    same as <5>  except
                                                                    applies to Layer 1
                                                                    (values of this
                                                                    quantity are computed
                                                                    only for daytime hours. )
p,(x,t)      same as p, except      Stage
 L ~         elevation^of top       W2
             of Layer 2.
                                        193

-------
                                  Table 8-1  (Concluded)
Input
Variable
                  Description
                                  Source    Stage
                                          Output
                                          Variable
Description
"vsv~'
            same as p- except
            top of Layer 1.

            same as p3 except
            top of raaiation
            inversion

            elevation (m MSL)
            of virtual surface
            in cell at (x) at
            hour t.  Note: z
             ZT when
                        = 0.
                                    P7


                                    P7



                                    P7
                             vs
ntf,.G<,t)
'vs
growth rate (m/sec)
of the radiation
inversion layer
depth.
                                    P7
                                         194

-------
                            Appendix to Section 8
     Some of the equations in this Processor, such as  (8-166), contain terms
of the form
that must be evaluated at each grid point (I,J) of the regional model domain.
In (8-A1) both  v and  p  are variables represented in discrete  form at each grid
point of the model region.  To fourth-order accuracy we can  represent (8-A1)
at grid point (I,J) by

          (rYHP>i,j  =  ui,A(pi,j> * VI,A(PI.J}                     (8"A2)
where
          VpI,J) =  I  (PI+I,J " PI-1,J} " 12 (PI+2,J ' PI-2,J}
and
          Ay (PI,J) = I (PI,J+1 ' PI,J-1} ' IZ (pI,J+2 ' Pl.J-2^
Here PT , is the value  of  p at point (I,J), i.e., column I, row 0,  with  rows
      l,vJ
parallel to the x axis and  columns parallel to y.
                                    195

-------
YYYYYYYYYYY YYY
N



)

i
9
1
3

^ 1
lyl
"rV
* A" ,
«• S •
3 *! .
T S '
K
j*
M
I
y
5
V

^ i<
i .5
9 15
                                                                                    3
                                                                                    Q.


                                                                                    O
                                                                                   •o

                                                                                    CD
                                                                                   «•«
                                                                                    3
                                                                                    Q.
                                                                                    C

                                                                                    V)
                                                                                   •**

                                                                                   •o
                                                                                    C
                                                                                    CD

                                                                                   00
                                                                                       I
                                                                                    o  >
                                                                                    0)  C
                                                                                    O  w
                                                                                    o  o
                                                                                   «•  w
                                                                                   Q.  co
                                                                                       (D
                                                                                    o  a
                                                                                    •=•§
                                                                                    o  w
                                                                                    t£  O
                                                                                    (D  u
                                                                                    E  42
                                                                                    CD  w
                                                                                    CO
                                                                                    ob

                                                                                    £

                                                                                    O)
                                    196

-------
                                   SECTION 8
                                 PROCESSOR P9
DEVELOPMENT
     This processor prepares the information necessary to correct the chemical
rate  constants  for  variations  in  atmospheric  density,  temperature,  cloud
cover, and  solar zenith angle.   Often the  top  of the regional model will lie
near the middle of the troposphere and therefore significant variations in air
density  and temperature can  exist between  each  of the  model's  layers.   All
rate  constants for the  intermolecular reactions are  affected by density and
many  are strongly  sensitive to  temperature  as  well.   The  photolytic  rate
constants are  affected  by the variations in  solar  radiation induced by cloud
scattering  and absorption,  and  by the variations in  radiation that accompany
changes  in  the  solar  zenith  angle.   We  treat  the  density  and temperature
correction  terms  in  Stage DEN,  and the  cloud and zenith corrections in Stage
ZEN.
Stage DEN
     The easiest way to handle the effects of atmospheric density variation on
the  pollutant concentrations  is  to work  with  the  species  mass   continuity
equation in its mixing ratio form.   Thus  let

          Y(r,t) = c(r,t)/p(r,t)                                          (9-1)
                                     197

-------
be the mixing ratio  of  a given  species, where c is the species concentration,
            -3
say, moles m  , and  p  is the  local  air density in the same units.  The mixing
ratio Y is dimensionless  and  is often expressed in terms of parts per million
(ppm).   Making use of  (9-1)  in  the species mass continuity equation (Eq. 2-1
of Part 1) we have

          af (YP)  + V * af ^ ' I + 5 '  ? •                           <9-4>
Thus,  the equation  governing the  mixing  ratio  Y has  the same  form  as the
equation  governing the  concentration c (i.e.,  Eq.  2-1 of Part 1) except that
the  inhomogeneous terms  S,  R  and W are  divided  by the  local  air density.
Notice that  Eq.   9-4 indicates  that material  is well-mixed (i.e., 9Y/3t =  0)
vertically when the mixing ratio is constant in  z.  However, the  concentration
form of   the  continuity  equation  yields   the  contradictory  result  that the
well-mixed state  is  achieved  only when  the concentration c is  independent  of
height.   The  latter  is  in  error because  it  fails to  take  into account  the
effects of  gravity on  the  mass distribution of  material  in the atmosphere.
The  mixing ratio  form  of the equation handles this  effect  implicitly  through
the  link  with  the air density p.   In short,  Eq.  (9-4)  is the proper  form  of
the  continuity  equation  for  use in applications  to atmospheric layers  deep
enough (> 103m) that air density variations are important.
                                    198

-------
     Normalization of the emissions function S by the air density is performed
by  Processor  P10.    Here  we  are  concerned  with  the  normalization  of  the
chemical reaction term R, which has the general form..

          R = kcd + kjc                                                  (9-5)
where  d is  the  concentration  of  a  species  with  which the  given  pollutant
reacts,  k  is  the rate constant (units of  mole  m3sec  ) of this second-order
reaction, and k-j is the rate constant for a first-order reaction that consumes
species c.   We can write (9-5) in the form
                                                                         (9.6)
where
          Yd = d/p
is the mixing  ratio of species .d.   Substituting  (9-6)  into (9-4) we have the
equation governing  Y-   In  it the  second-order  rate constants  have the form
          k* = kp.                                                       (9-7)
but  the  first-order  rate constants  are unchanged.  In  order  for  the model
equations to predict mixing ratio, we must supply the kinetics algorithm with
effective air  densities for  each layer  so  that the rate  constants k can be
modified in the  manner of (9-7).  For this  purpose, and also for normalizing
the  emission  strengths S  in  Processor P10,  we compute  in  this stage  average
air  densities  for each of the model's four  layers.   Concurrently,  we  compute
average temperatures for  each cell and  layer  for use within the model  itself
to make  temperature  corrections  on the  rate constants.   The  rationale for
supplying temperature data to the model rather than  temperature  corrected rate
constants  is  to avoid  any  procedure that  would  "hard wire"  a  particular
chemical kinetics scheme into the model or the input processor network.

-------
     Let  Tvm(z,t)  and  pn(z,t)  be  the  virtual  temperature  and  density,

respectively, at  elevation  z(MSL)  at hour t over rawin  station m, and let z

be the ejevation (m MSL) of that station.  Now define


                        m    om

                        p|"(2)dz                                          (9"8)
                       zm
                             "on, + hlm
                             hom
                          .
-------
     The  integrals  on  the right-hand  side of  Eqs.  (9-8)  -  (9-11) can  be
evaluated  by  subdividing  the  integration interval into 50m  subintervals  that
coincide wit.h the intervals at which T  (z) and Pm(z) are  available (from  PI).
Similarly, we define
                        (m    om    1m
                       Ttfn,U)dz                                         (9-12)
                            hom
                                                                        (9-13)
          3n, '
                        • + hom +hlm +h2m
     The  temperature  and density  profiles  T   and  pm are available  from  PI
each  hour but  they give  values  only  at the  measurement station sites >r.
Therefore,  the  layer  averaged density  and  temperature  values derived  from
(9-8) -  (9-14)  must be interpolated to each  grid  cell location.   Use the r
weighting scheme as follows:
                         ^ >1>n»
            = —S^j	     n = 0,1.2,3               (9-15)
                  nil        II   ^
                              Z rm
                             m=lm
          =-=±	      n = 1,2,3                 (9-16)
                             M  .1
                            rn^l^
                                    201

-------
where
               rm = K^-V2 + (Jty-yB)2].                             (9-17)
              _6
The  factor  10   in the density  equation  (9-15) is necessary when  the  mixing
ratio Y  is  expressed  as  parts per million (ppm).   The  factors  

n generated by this stage will pass through the B-matrix compiler (BMC) unchanged and will be used in the model to modify the second-order rate constants k in the manner described above in Eq. (9-7), namely k* = k

n (9-18) where k* is the modified rate constant in Layer n. (Keep in mind that the first-order constants are not modified by the density.) As we noted above, we assume that the second-order rate constants k are expressed in units of (moles .3 .1. .1 m ) sec . (Consistency of the concentration units throughout the model should be confirmed by comparing the parameters generated in this processor, the source strength functions provided by Processor P10, the initial concentration fields produced by Processor P2, and the rate constants contained in the chemical kinetics subroutine CHEM- that operates in unison with the model.) The layer averaged temperature values n given by (9-16) above also pass unmodified into the model at operation time. These data are made available there for temperature corrections to those rate constants that require it. The input-output summary of stage DEN is given in Table 9-1, and the processor is illustrated schematically in Figure 9-1. 202


-------
 Stage ZEN
     All  of the  photolytic  rate constants  require adjustments for  the  local
 solar  zenith  angle     and  cloud  cover..   We  assume following  Jones, et  al
  1981) that these "constants" can be expressed  in  the  form
 •here  ka(s)  is the "clear sky" photolytic  rate  constant  for  reaction  a  and E
 cc)  is an empirical  function of  the cloud  cover cc =  cc(h), which is  the
 -raction  (0 <  cc £ 1) of  the sky covered by clouds  of  height h.  We assume
 further that the  clear sky  constants  kffl are  contained  in the chemical kinetics
 subroutine  of  the regional  model code in the  functional forms k (s  is  virtually independent of altitude).    Thus,
 Processor, P9,  particularly Stage ZEN, must  supply  the following fields to the
 model by way of the model input file  MIF:

          ,(I,J,t_) = solar  zenith angle in cell (I,J) at hour t
           s      m    (units  of degrees of  arc);                 m       (9-20)
and
          E(I,J,t ) = cloud cover correction factor for photolytic
                 m    rate  constants  in cell (1,0)  at  hour t              (9-21)
                      (dimensionless).

The zenith  angle    can be obtained  from standard  astronomical formulas  given
 the latitude (JA) and longitude (IA\) of cell  (I,J),  and  the  date and  hour tm
of the  period^ of interest.    The  factor  E is  obtained from the formulas  given
 in Jones,  et  al (1981) using the  observed cloud cover cc(h)  in cell  (I,J) at
 hour tm.  We will not elaborate on  the computation  of    and E here.
      m                                                 &
                                     203

-------
     In summary, the  solar  zenith angle <]>  is used in each grid cell and hour
to determine  the clear sky  rate  constant kff for each  photolytic  reaction a.
These values are multiplied  in turn by the cloud cover factor E for that cell
and hour to arrive at the corrected rate constant
The photolytic constants are not modified by the density correction terms 

generated in Stage DEN. The inputs and outputs of Stage ZEN are summarized in Table 9-1. 204


-------
              Table 9-1.   Summary of the  input  and output variables
                          of each stage of Processor P9 and their sources.
Input
Variable
     Description
Source    Stage
                                           Output
                                          Variable
                  Description
 vm
   (z,t.)
virtual temperature
(°c) at elevation z
(m MSL) at hour tk
over rawin  station
 PI
                                  DEN
0
 m
same as T   except
density (KSJnr3)

elevation (m MSL)
of rawin  station m
h0(I>J»t.J  thickness (m) of
            Layer 0 at time
            t.  in grid cell
                        PI


                        RAW


                        P7
                  2


                  3
density correction
for rate constants
in Layer 0, cell
(I,J) hour t^ (units
10"6 moles m"3)

same as 

except applies to Layer 1 same as

except applies to Layer 2 same as

except applies to Layer 3 average temperature (°c) in Layer 1, cell (I,J), hour tk (for temperature correction of rate constants in model) h-,(I h2(I h,(I ,J,t.) N ,J.tk) ,J,tk) fv same as Layer 1 same as Layer 2 same as Layer 3 hft except 0 h except h except P7 P8 P8 2 same as Layer 2 o same as * J Layer 3 , except JL 1 except cc(x ,h,t ) fractional sky coverage of clouds of height h (low, middle, and high) at surface weather station n at hour RAW ZEN »sa,J,y SCI.J.V solar zenith angle (degrees) at grid cell (I,J) at hour t (used to obtain pnotolytic rate constant values). cloud cover cor- rection factor (dimensionless) for photolytic rate constants in cell (I,J) at hour t 205


-------
  D
O) O.
Q. H
     YY.YYYYYY
A
OJ
A
cj.
V
n
A
«x
V
A

V
CM
A

V
en
A

V
                             Q. ^

                             S- O
                             O 2
                             (O -M
                             10 0)
                             
                             +J
                             V> JC
                             3 4->
                              I/I
                             U 9)
                             •p- o
                             -»-> 10
                              §<4-

                              QJ
                             f -M
                             U C
                             «/) -i-
                              I
                             cn

                             01
              206

-------
                                   SECTION 9
                                 PROCESSOR P10
DEVELOPMENT
     Processor P10 transforms the emissions inventory into the source strength
           «v
functions  S,  S^ and S«.   It  is  assumed that the emissions  data  have already
been structured to provide the following information:   (1) total  emission rate
(moles  hr  )  of each  primary pollutant from all mobile  and minor stationary
sources  in each of  the model's grid  cells,  at  each  hour  of the simulation
period;  (2)  emission  rate  (moles  hr  ) of each primary pollutant  each hour
for  all  major point  sources; and  (3)  the physical  parameters  necessary to
determine  in  which   grid  cell  each  major  point  source lies  and   what  its
effective  source  height will  be under given  meteorological  conditions.   Here
"major"  point source  refers  to any  point source  whose  discharge rate  of a
given  pollutant  exceeds  some  prespecified threshold.   This processor also
computes the plume volume fraction £ which is used  in the Layer 0 equations to
parameterize subgrid scale chemistry effects.

     The three basic  tasks  involved  in  computing the  source  strengths are
estimating the effective  heights of the major point sources; partitioning the
point  and  area  source emissions  among  the three layers  0,  1, and  2; and
converting the results to units of  ppm.   The  first  of  these  operations is
performed  in  Stage DELH — the  last  two are done  in  Stage  S.   We should add
here  that  the  units  conversion is  necessary  because concentration must be
                                    207

-------
expressed in  ppm  in  the  governing  equations in  order to  account  for  the



variation of atmospheric density with elevation (see the discussion presented



with the description of Processor P9).  The calculation of the parameter £ in



this processor is performed in Stage ZTA.
Stage DELH



     Suppose that  there  are a total  of K major point  sources  in the entire



modeling  region,  and let the  subscript "k"  designate  any  one of  them.   We



compute  the  plume  rise  Ah. (t )  of  the k-th source  at hour t   as follows.
                           l\  HI                                Hi






     Let  [I(k),J(k)]  be  the grid  cell  (column  I,  row  J) in which the k-th



source lies.   Then
                  •[
0, if L[I(k),J(k),tra] < 0;


   Ft 1/3                                        (10-1)

3 (^|)   , otherwise.
Here L[I,J,t ]  is  the Obukhov length (meters) in cell  (I,J)  at hour t , and
                 VTak        2
          Fk = g[ K  alC  3 («Dkwk.                                      (10-2)

           *     Tk H- 273      * K





In this expression TV  is the exhaust temperature (°C)  of the  stack,  D^ is  the


                                                     -1                 -2
stack diameter  (m),  wk  its  exhaust velocity  (m sec  ), g = 9.8 m sec    is



gravity, and




                 N   _2


                 VnkTvn
-------
is the estimated surface air temperature (°C)  at the location  of  source  k.   In
(10-3)
(*n»yn)  is  the location of surface weather  station  n and T   is the  virtual
temperature (°C) measured at that station at  hour t .

     In Eq. (10-1)

          u = [(1)2 +
                 (^(KlO.JdO.t^)2]*
where  1 and  1 are  the  Layer  1  averaged wind  components  (m  sec"1).
Finally, the parameter s in (10-1) is approximated by

                .2
          s =
                  2    ~2   ~1
where c  =  1003  m  sec   °K  .   This expression for the stability  parameter s
assumes an isothermal temperature lapse rate throughout the depth of the  layer
that the buoyant source emissions traverse.
     The effective height of source k at hour t  is now estimated to be
                                               m
where z .  is the stack height (m) of source k.

     By virtue of  the  assumption embodied in (10-1) for  the  case of negative
L, expression (10-6) yields effective source heights equal to  the actual  stack
                                    209

-------
height  z  under neutral and unstable atmospheric  conditions.   Although plume
rise  does  occur under  these conditions, it is not  particularly important in
our  regional  scale  grid model  because under these conditions  vertical  mixing
is  so strong that  pollutants  are  nearly  uniformly  spread  through the mixed
layer before horizontal transport has moved them out of the grid cell in which
they were released.

     For  example,  with a  horizontal  grid  size  of  18,000 m and a horizontal
wind  speed  of 4 m sec  , material  has  a residence  time of 4500 sec in a grid
cell.   The  time scale of vertical mixing during unstable conditions is on the
order of 2h/w*.   Typical  values of the mixed layer  depth h and velocity scale
w*  are  1500  and  1.5 m  sec   ,  respectively.    Hence,   vertical  mixing  is
completed  within the  time  material is  resident  in the  cell  surrounding the
source  and  consequently the actual height of the emission is not significant.
.(A  much  more  important factor in  this  instance  is the  lack  of complete
horizontal  mixing of  point  source plumes  within  a grid  cell.   Although the
material  is  well  mixed  vertically,  it may  occupy a  volume only  1  km wide
whereas  the grid model  treats  the  emissions  as  though  they fill the entire
cell  uniformly.  This discrepancy  is   a  subgrid scale  phenomenon  that the
current  regional model does  not  treat in Layers 1, 2 and 3.   It  is  potentially
a  source of considerable error  in  the photochemical reaction  simulations  that
should be considered  in future modeling  applications.)

      In-stable  conditions,  vertical mixing is very  weak  or  nonexistent and  in
that  case point source emissions must be placed  in the proper layer.

      Table  10-1  summarizes the  input  and output parameters associated  with
Stage OELH.
                                     210

-------
Stage S
     Having  estimated  the  effective discharge  heights  of the  major  point
                                                                          *v
sources in  Stage  DELH,  we can now compute the source strength  functions  S,  S^
and S2.

     In this task we must take into account that the ground  surface  can extend
into Layers  1  and 2 where hills penetrate the model layer surfaces  H  and H^.
Figure 10-1 illustrates the  relationships between the layer  interfaces and the
terrain.    (See  Fig.  4-7  of Part  1.    Recall  that a^ is  the  fraction  of
surface H^  that  is  penetrated by terrain, and that ow is the corresponding
fraction for surface H  .)
Let
                 be  the emission rate (moles h   ) of a  given  primary  pollutant
from  the  k-th major point  source  at hour tm, and  let E(I,J,tm) be the  total
emission rate (moles hour   ) of that pollutant  from  all  other  sources  in grid
cell  (I,J)  at  time  t  .   The  source  strength  functions for  each  primary
                       m
pollutant have the following forms.
                                                                LAYER 2
                                                                        H1
             _^^f^fm^:^-:-'-
      ^...............-rrr^'^v^vvK--- -
Figure 10-1.
         Illustration of the influence of  terrain  on model  layers 0,  1 and 2
         for given values of the penetration  fractions  aT1  and ovn.
                               211                       (1        u

-------
                                 K
                                k=l .
          1 = C(aTO-an)E + 2 E,
                                      k=l
                                 k=l
where  CTTO,    E,  HI§  and  h2 are  functions of  (I,J,tm);  and ER  and I
depends on t .  The latter is defined by
                      .0, otherwise.
                                         < «k < (Zj -
where
           ^ = 2T(I(k),J(k)).
z  =
                                  zT(I(k),J(k))
               h1(I(k),J(k),tm)
               h2(I(k),J(k),tm)
and h  is the thickness of Layer n.  Also
                                                                         (10-
                                    212

-------
          A2 = A                                                       (10-11)
          Al ~ (1 " aTl)A                                              (10-12)
          A0=(l-aTO)A                           •           '        (10-13)
          A  = a2(cos
                      S(I,J,t)       T
                                             (ppm m/sec)
               'V   W.J.V'o
where    is  the average  air density  (units  = 10    moles m  )  in
Layer  n,  time tm  in  cell  (I,J).  Eqs.  (10-15)  - (10-17) should  be  evaluated
                                     213

-------
for  each  primary pollutant  at  each hour,  level  and  grid  cell; the  result*
should be  recorded  in the MIF.   The inputs  and  outputs of Stage S  and their
sources and destinations are summarized in Table  10-1.
Stage ZTA
     The  plume  volume  fraction  parameter  £(I,J)  is  used  in  the  Layer  0
equations to parameterize  subgrid  scale chemistry effects (see Chapters 5 and
8 of Part 1).  Here we use a very simple approximation to  estimate it.

     Let  L(I,J)  be  the  total  length (m) of  major line  sources in cell  (I,J),
let N  (I,J) be the total number of minor point sources  in cell (I,J),  and let
Nmj(I,J)  be the total  number of major point sources that lie in  Layer 0 in
cell (I,J>  (from Stage S).  Then we assume
          Cd.J.t.) = C(Nmp +Nmj)(h0)  + Lh0]/A                        .(10-18)

where h   is  the depth of Layer  0  in cell (I,J) at  hour  t  and A is given by
(10-14).  (This is Eq. 8-7 in Part 1.)
     Input and output information for this stage are summarized in Table 10-1,
and a  schematic  illustration of the relationship  among the stages and I/O  is
provided in Figure 10-2.
                                     214

-------
               Table 10-1.
                            Summary of input and output parameters for
                            Processor P10 and their sources.
Input
Variable
LCI.J.V
Description
Obukhov length
(m) in cell (I,J)
at hour t
Source
P4
Stage
DELH
Output
Variable
• w
Description
effective source height
(m) of k-th major point
source at hour t .
                                                                                     .
                                                                                    m
             virtual temperature
             (°C) at surface
             weather station n
             at time t.
                       .

, Layer 1 averaged
             east-west wind
             (m/sec) in cell
             (I,J), hour tffl.

        ra
  same as j  except
" north-south
  component

 temperature (°C)
 of exhaust gas
 of major point
 source  k at hour
 V
 diameter (m) of
 stack k.
                                   P3
                                   Pll
                                   Pll
                                  .RAW
                                   RAW
wt^tm^      exhaust velocity
    m       (m/sec) of stack       RAW
            k.

[I(k),J(k)] grid cell coordinates  RAW
            (row J, column I) of
            major point source k.

z k         stack height (m) of    RAW
            source k
E,/t ;°0    emission rate (moles/  RAW
 K  m       hr) of species a at
            time t  from major
            point source k
                                                    S(I,J,tm;cO
                                                        emission rate (ppm
                                                        m/sec) of species a
                                                        at hour t  from all
                                                        sources in Layer 0,
                                                        cell  (I,J).
                                        215

-------
                              Table 10-1.   (Continued)
Input
Variable
               Description
                 Output
Source   Stage .  Variable
  Description
E(I»Jft_;ot) emission rate
       m    (moles/hr) of
            species a from all
            except major point
            sources in grid cell
            (I,J,) at hour t,

ovn(I,J,t ) fraction (non-
                            m
JTO
         m
            dimensional) of
            model surface H
            penetrated by
            terrain.

crT1(I,J,t ) same as ovn except
 IJ-      m  applies tiusurface
zt(I,J)     average terrain
            elevation (m.MSL)
            in cell (I,J).

h (I,J,t )  thickness (m) of
            Layer 0 at hour
            tm in cell (I,J)

Ml.J.tJ  thickness (m) of
            Layer 1 at time
            tm, cell (I.J).
        m
h2(I,J,t )  same as h, except
            applies to Layer 2.
 . (t )
            effective source
            height of major
            point source k
2
            mean air density
            (moles m~3) in
            Layer 2 at hour
            tm, cell (I,J)
            same as 

2 except applies to Layer 1. RAW S (Cont.) P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P8 DELH P9 P9 S2(I,J,tm;a) emission rate (p sec'1) of specie at hour t from sources in Layer cell (I,J). emission rate (pi seer1) of specie at hour t from . sources in Layer cell (I,J). total number of i point sources in 0, cell (I,J) at V 216


-------
                                     Table 10-1.  (Completed)
Input
Variable
               Description
                                  Source   Stage
 Output
Variable
Description
0
            same as 

2 except applies to Layer 0. P9 L(I,J) total length (m) of major line sources in cell N (I,J) number of minor p point sources in cell (I,J). N .(I,J,t ) total number of J major point sources in Layer 0, cell (I,J) at hour tm h (I,J,t ) depth (m) of Layer 0 m 0 in cell (I,J) at time t,. m RAW ZTA .fraction (0<£<1) of Layer 0 in cell (I,J.) filled by line and point source plumes at hour t . m RAW Stage S P7 217


-------
        YYYY
                         •i
03
            218 .

-------
                                  SECTION 10
                                 PROCESSOR Pll

SUMMARY
     Processor  Pll generates  families  of  vertically integrated  horizontal
winds for each of the model's layers.   During daytime hours, namely times when
the  surface  heat flux  is  positive, this  processor produces wind  fields for
each of  the  model's  three  layers.  However,  at  night  when surface inversions
exist, it provides winds for Layers 2 and 3 only.  In this case the flow field
in  Layer 1  is  generated  in Processor  P7,  and the  results are passed into
Processor Pll for amalgamation  with the wind fields  derived here.
                                    219

-------
INTRODUCTION

     Previous air pollution models  have  represented the wind  fields  either b
continuous functions  fit  to discrete  meteorological  data,  or by  flow field
derived from mesoscale  meteorological  models.   In  this  study we  use  neithe
of these approaches.  Following  the consideration presented in Chapters  6 ani
7 of Part  1  of this  report and  in  Lamb  (1983a), we use  wind  observations an<
physical principles  jointly to  define  a  set or  family of  flow  fields  eact
member of which  Is  a possible description of the  flow  that existed during the
time that  the  observations  were made.   In  the aforementioned  papers it  is
argued that  in  the  case   of  the  atmosphere,  observations  and  physical  laws
together are inadequate to specify flow  patterns  to  within better than a set
of functions.  The  ability of so-called objective  analysis  schemes to produce
a single  functional  description  of a given  discrete  set  of data  stems  from
the imposition  of  additional  constraints  that  are  not  founded  in physical
laws and  which therefore  lack universal  validity.   In  the  more  sophisticated
of these schemes, use is made of  empirical  data such as spatial auto-correlation
functions of the flow  in  the  given  region.   Our  position  is that  this type
of empirical information is of great value, but its  proper role is in  estimating
the probabilities of the  members  of the  set of possible  flows  that  specific
observations and  physical   principles  together  define.   These members  of  the
wind field  set that  have  finite  probability constitute  an ensemble  of wind
fields.  For a given distribution  of pollutant  sources,  there is  a  one-to-one
correspondence, through the equation  of  species mass conservation  and  chemical
reaction, between  each  member  of the  flow  ensemble  and each member  of a
concentration  ensemble.   In other  words,  having defined the  ensemble of  flow
fields one can generate the ensemble of concentration fields associated with a
                                      220

-------
given  emissions  distribution by  "driving"  the air pollution  model  with each
member of  the  flow ensemble and recording the  outcomes.   Ensemble statistics
of the concentration can then be derived by performing averages of the desired
quantity  over  the  ensemble set,  weighting  each  member  of  the  set  by  the
probability  of  the  flow  field  from  which  that  particular  concentration
distribution was derived.

     This  approach  to  pollution  modeling  is  much  more  costly  than  the
conventional  method  of formulating  differential  equations  that yield  the
desired  statistics   directly.    However,   our  approach  has  at  least  two
advantages that  in  our judgement compensate  several  fold  for  the added cost.
The  first  is  that  by  deriving ensemble  properties  from  a  subset of  the
ensemble  itself,  we  avoid  major  sources  of  error  associated  with  the
assumptions that one  must  invoke to formulate a set of differential  equations
that describe  a  particular statistical  property.   In the case of modeling the
long range transport  of photochemical  pollutants, the nonlinear character and
interaction of the  processes  involved  are so complex that it is very unlikely
that a  single  set of  equations  exist  that would yield accurate estimates of
even the simplest statistical properties under all conditions.

     A second  advantage  of our approach is that  it provides direct access to
all  of  the  statistical  properties  of  concentration,  such  as the  mean,
variance,  frequency distribution,  spectrum,   etc.,  whereas  the  conventional
method gives only  those limited properties,  usually  only  the mean,  for which
equations   have   been   hypothesized.     Following   we  describe   the  basic
mathematical steps  implemented  in this processor for deriving the ensemble of
flow fields in each of the model's layers.
                                    221

-------
AVERAGE HORIZONTAL WINDS IN A LAYER BOUNDED BY TWO ARBITRARY PRESSURE SURFACES
     In  this  section  we develop  a  general  method  for. deriving vertically
averaged  winds  in  a  given  layer.   Later we  will  apply  it  to  each  of the
model's three layers to obtain the necessary horizontal flow fields.

     As  in Part  I  we define  the cell averaged  value  between  two pressure
surfaces pff and pR (pa > pft, i.e., surface a has the lower elevation)
                               Pp(x',y')
          <())(x>y)>  = _£.  \  l |(x;yl,p)dpdx1dyl                        (11-la)
                  P   Vap
                           A  Pa(xly')
where A denotes the rectangular domain x -    < x'< x +  *, y -  ^ < y1 < y +
of a model grid cell; and $ is an arbitrary scalar or vector function.  The
averaging volume Vtfg is given by
                             Pp(xiy')
                                      Jy1                       ~          (11-lb)
                          A  pa(xly')

Note  that  since p^ > p0,  both V _ and the  integrals in (11-la)  are  negative
                  U    p   ™""""""  up                                    --
(assuming i)»0).

     Suppose  that  observations  of  v are available at  N  arbitrary  sites  on
surface pfl, i.e.,
                                     222

-------
                                 n=l,2,...N.
where  (x ,y )  denotes  the  location  of observation  n.   (Throughout  this
section,  we  shall  use  the  caret  (~)  to  signify  observed  values  of  a
parameter.)   Suppose  further  that  we  have  measurements of  v  and  other
meteorological parameters along vertical lines between surfaces p  and pg at a
total of M locations, i.e., we have
          vm(p,t) = v(xra,ym,p,t),     m=l,2...M.                        (11-3)
These surface observations  and sounding sites are illustrated in Figure 11-1.
In general the number N of surface stations must equal or exceed the number of
soundings, i.e.,

          N > M.                                                        (11-4)

     Later we would  like  the option of supplementing the rather sparse upper
air  data  with  estimates  of  the  flow aloft  extrapolated from  the numerous
surface   measuring   stations.    Toward  this  end  we  define  the  function
^(Xjy.p.t) to  be the  ratio of the wind velocity at  (x,y,p,t) to the value at
(x,y,p,.t)  where a is   any  pressure  level.   Specifically,  we  have g^  =
      u           *"                                                     —U
(gua'gva) where
          n  fy v n
          gvcr(x,y,p,
                                    223

-------
                                                            VERTICAL SOUNDINGS
                                       SURFACE OBSERVATIONS1
                                           AT N SITES
  "9ure
                       A.o.^' th° H°"-*
              Available on the Bottom SurS   o? Layer  * "" 9re a'S°
      Assuming that j and v vary by only «„ fract1ons of themselves ^

 ranges over the area A of any grid „„, we get fron (u.1) ^            ''
0 *
	  1 ga(x,y,p,
 *  Pg     J "
                                              t)dp
                                      (11-6)
or
          p * ^(x.y.
5»/y^'x»Jr » ''Jo
          P
where
                    =  v(x.y,paft),
                                                                       (11-7)
                                                                       (11-8)
                                   224

-------
i
        and 0 is defined as  in (11-1).
             -a P
]  .          At the M sites of  the measurements of the vertical  wind profile,  we can
i        •                                                    .

!       evaluate D.   We have
:                 ~ P




                                                      .y   t)>
                               8 at  each  point (x,y) in space  by


        interpolation of the  "observed"  values 0.  That is,  we assume
                                                sown p
                  p  *
                                           m
                                       m=l m ~
                                                    _
       where W  (r)is  a weighting  function,  e.g.,  r   ,  to  be selected later,  and r is
              HI ***                                 *^*                               *"**


       the  vector  separation  of  (x,y)  and the  observation  site  (xm>ym)-   Using


       (11-10)  and the N (>M)  observations v of the wind on surface p , we  can ap-


       proximate the  layer  average winds at all  those points (x ,y ), n#n,  where wind


       observations are available only on the surface p ,   In other words,  we use the


       horizontally interpolated  0 function to approximate layer averaged winds at
                                   - P

       points  where  only  surface wind  observations  are  available.  Thus,  we define
                                            225

-------
where
8 is given by (11-10), and the vector product on  the  right  side  of  (11-11)
is defined by
             E (axbx>ayy
where     a = (ax,ay) and b = (bx,by).
     We will  work  later with the stream function and velocity potential  which
are  functions of  the  vorticity  and  divergence,  respectively,  of  the  wind
field.  The vertical component of vorticity £ is defined by
            z k-Vxv =
                          ax ay ap
                          U  V  W
(11-12)
and the horizontal divergence 6 is
          A _ 3u  . 3v .
          6 =    +
(11-13)
     Since we  are concerned with layer averaged  winds  ,  we must determine
how <£>  and   are related and how <6> and  are related.  From (11-1) and
     «        f**                               **
(11-12)
                            t
                        ay
                                                                        (11-14)
                                     226

-------
From Part I, page 21,  we have
                                 '  v -      ' +     1n
                     .    —aT*   —~*
                     A   /..    a
where A  is the  horizontal  area on which  <  > is defined;  V  _  is  defined by
(11-lb);
and

                         CxiylPtxly1 ))dx'4y-                          (11"16)
                     A
with a similar definition of the  surface average
Assumption:   On pa,  v(x,y,pa)  -   and on p
                    v(x,y,pft)  - .                              (11-17)
                    ~      p    ~
In this case we have
                 -   \ \ 9pcr  dx'dy1,
                 "  A  J J ax1"
                                    227

-------
Note that


                               _3_  I 1 I    dpdx'dy1

                                    ' J * -» /
                                    A   Pa(
                          IT  al 11 CPB(xly')-p (xjy1)] dx'dy'        (11-19)
where the domain A is a function of x inasmuch as A = x-Ax/2 
-------
     Using Helmholz  theorem that  any vector  can be written  as  the sum of  a


rotational and a divergent component we can write
          v = v... + v
          ~   ~¥   ~X
from which we have
(11-23)
                     *• .                                            (11-24)





Since  by  definition vju  is nondivergent,  we  can  express  it  in  terms of the
                     **T


stream function V:



               = k x W                                                 (11-25)
and  since v   is  irrotational  we  can  express  it  in terms  of  the velocity
            A


potential x:



          <> = VX.                                                    (11-26)
From (11-25) we get
< V =
                  i  i  *

                  001
                 ajF &¥ 8V
                 3x 3y 3p
(11-27)
and from (11-26)
           =
     ~ ax ~   ay &'
(11-28)
Combining~(ll-24), (11-27), and  (11-28) we  get
                                                                       (ll-29a)
                                     229

-------
          <»» • g * fjj * ; .                                           (11'29b)
where u  and v  are  the average  values of    and  over  the  entire model
region- and are known functions of time only.
     Differentiating these  expressions  in the manner of  (11-21),  (11-22), we
get
                                                                      (ll-30a)
              = V2X.                                                  (ll-30b)
We seek the functional forms of V and x that are consistent both with physical
laws  and  with our  observations rio,n=l. ..N  (see  Equation 11-11).
      •~~—                    -      *"  n  n    UD
(We assume that the wind observations are error free.)

     Our  observation  set might represent a time  period in the past for which
we  would  like  to  determine  the  origin  of pollutants  responsible  for  an
episode;  or  it might represent so-called worst-case meteorological conditions
for which we wish to test a control strategy; or so on.

     We will consider only two of the physical laws as  constraints  on  the  flow
fields that we consider, the momentum law and the  mass  conservation principle.
In pressure coordinates  these are expressed, respectively,  by

            f~ + (v-VH)v + ur~ + f k x v = - V4>  +  Kv2y  + FH
                                                                        (11-31)

            •Vu-v +  9u)/3p =  0                                            (11-32)
            "^n **•*
                                    230

-------
where u> is the "vertical velocity" in pressure coordinates, i.e.,
          io =
  is  the  geopotential  height,  f  the  Coriolis  parameter,  K  the  "eddy
viscosity", F,.  represents the  viscous  source  of  negative momentum,  and v =
(u,v) as  before.   Expanding  (11-31) into its two components and using (11-13)
we get
         !! * $ * 4i!  .„.-»  + KtSjj .    , . FHX              (n.34)
  3t    3x     3y    3p           3y     «, 2
                                         9x    oy
                         5 = - au)/ap                                   (11-36)

     It is  useful  to convert (11-34) and (11-35) into the vorticity equation,
partly as  a means  of eliminating  explicit dependence  of  the velocity on .
Guided by  (11-12)  we differentiate (11-35) with respect to x  and  (11-34) with
respect to y and then subtract the two equations to get
                                                                        (11-37)
            r3u> 3v   3iu 3un _ „ r32t  . 32g-,  . 9FHy  - 9FHx
            C5x 3p " 3y §p] " K [2 +   2]    3x    "3y~
                                     231

-------
     The equation governing  <6>  is found by  averaging  (11-36) in the manner
of (11-1):
                         pp
                          |dpdx'dy'
                         P«
          <6> = r  II K^iy')  ' «"B(x',y')]dx'dy'                      (11-39)
                 otp J •*              p
where u»a  denotes u(x;y;Pcf).  Using  (11-16)  we can write  (11-39)  in the final
form
              =     [3°- ;#].                                           (11-40)
Later when we apply (11-40) we will  describe approximations of 3", etc.

     Turning next to  the  vorticity  equation (11-37) and the derivation of the
equation  governing  <£>,  we see that  under assumption  (11-17) we  can write

          3v  8u  ~
          §p' 9p  ~ °'             (under assumption 11-17)             (11-41)

This  permits the term  in brackets  in (11-37)  to  be neglected.   (This term
represents the  generation of £ by the  rotation  of  horizontal vorticity.)  We
will also omit the "beta" term 3f/3y in (11-37).   With these approximations we
can write (11-37) in the  simplier form
                                    232

-------
                                                                     (11-42)
where we have  used the approximation (see Haltiner 1971, page 151)
          FH = - gI                                                 (11-43)
and T is the  shear stress.



     Averaging  (11-42) in  the manner  of  (11-1) we  generate  the following

terms, expressed following the analyses  of  Part I:



           • K <«> + «> a! ln §1
                                                                     (11-45)
                               .     8p    3p

                               V
                       +  ^ ln(Vap)
                               Vap   3y      8y
                                   233

-------
               are quite complex and we will approximate them simply by




              9x2 >    »?                                            (11-48)


  Combining all  the above and assuming <£6>  = <£><5>>  we  get

                                     a
                 + 'YH<£>  - <£>  Cg|lnVaB  + .VHlnV   * 2<6>]
                                                      ;•>
                                                                        (11-49)
 where
            «    «''                                                 (11-52)

 and
In  deriving  (11-49)  we  aSsumed that  j2 =  0 on  pp ,„  anticipation of  the

eventua!  use of  this  equation In applications where the  upper surface p   Is

above the friction ,ayer.  We win use Haltlner's approximation (page  152)  for
TZ, namely
                                    234

-------
          tz = P0CD                                                 (11-54)
where pQ is air density in. layer a,p, in particular the mixed layer; CQ is the
drag coefficient  and    is the layer averaged wind  vector given by (11-51).

     It is  convenient to  group the terms in (11-49) according to whether they
represent sources or sinks of  <£>.   The terms involving £' do  not fall  into
either  category,  but for  now we will  combine them with the  source terms and
write (11-49) in  the  form
                                                       2
     at ^ + J <£> + J <£> + <£>G - K[-2«  + i-» ] = H     (11-55)
                              y                ax     ay
where
          H E - f<6>
                       Va6
               3
          t  •    ^  '   -  •                                         (11-58)
     We are  now ready to  collect  the equations that we  will  use to generate
the  V  and x  fields.   First,  let  the  superscript denote the  time variable,
i.e.,
                                    235

-------
             =   ,  i.e.,
                                                                        (11-60)
                      00
          J = Af(V(k)elJS'~
-------
Note from (ll-61a) that
JK/V3 =
ax  <•
                          ••

                          -00
                                            y
                                                                       (11-64)
£, J»
                              9 J     ^'X
                             k5r(Js)e    dk dk ,
                          -09
                                                                       (11-65)
and in general



          an

          axr
                          n J

                       k) 4
                                                             (11-66)
Now, replacing each term in (11-60) by its Fourier transform and making use  of


(11-63) and (11-66) we get
                                              + k2)|J(2n)2
                                                             (11-67)
                   00
                 J
                  -OB
                                    237

-------
where
          GJ <-» GJ                                                     (ll-68a)
          HJ «-»• ffJ                                                     (ll-68b)
              -» J                                                   (ll-69a)
              -» J                                                   (ll-69b)

     We want equations  for V  and x-   Thus, we obtain from (ll-30a) and (11-66)
                                                                        (11-70)
where

          ^(x) ^  AJ(k).                                               (11-71)
Using  (11-70) in  (11-67) we obtain  one of the  equations  governing 4*. namely
                                    y         k2 + -2
                                               X
                               oo
                             f
                   At
                        9
                                                                         (11-72)
                                     238

-------
The transforms U   and V  of the  velocity  components   and   can now be

expressed in the form (see 11-29)

             = -ik AJ + ikxBJ + GJ6(jk)                                (ll-73a)

             =  ik A° + 1k 8° + vJ6(k)                                (ll-73b)
                  x       y         ~
where
          XJ(x) *-» SJ(k)                                              (ll-73c)
and  S(k)  is  the  delta function  of  the  wave  number vector  k.   Then  from

(ll-30b), (11-40), and (11-66) we find that BJ must satisfy
                                                                       (11-74)
where
                         A         a          P
                   <5> = ^— — [ui (x.JAt) - w (x.JAt)]                (11-75)
                                    "
and u> is considered to be a known variable.


     Finally,  the  observations nQ given by  (11-11) must be satisfied.
                                 ** ~n  UD
Hence, from (11-29), (ll-61a), (11-66), and (11-11) we have
                                   i k*x
         9 f f C-k AJ^k) + k¥BJ(k)]e ~ ~ndk = nR -  u(JAt)
     (2n)2jl    y   ~     x   ~         ~      ~n      OB              (u.76)

           -09
                                             n=l,2...N;
                                     239

-------
                                   •X
                                    ~n dk =
     (271Y" '
          "     •                                                       (11-77)
          '-00
                                                  n=l,2...N

where x  = (x^,y  )  are the observation sites described above,  and u and v are
      ~n      n  n
the averaged observed winds in the entire model  domain at time  t = JAt.
     Equations (11-72, 74,  76  and 77) comprise a set  of 2N + 2 relationships
that  the transforms A and  8,  or  equivalently   and  ,  must satisfy.   A
fundamental  difference  between  this  system  of equations  and  the  system
currently used in  meteorological  modeling is the presence of the 2N equations
(11-76,  77)  associated  with  the wind  observations  made  at  time JAt.   In
conventional meteorological models,  the  observed data are transformed through
ad  hoc means into a  description  of  an initial velocity  field;  and using it,
the two  equations  (11-72 and 74) are  solved  as an  initial  value problem.  As
we  shall  discuss  below,  this  practice  is  not supportable  on  scientific
grounds,  and when  it is  employed,   the velocity field that one  obtains is
largely  an  artifact  of  the ad hoc procedure  that was used in the formulation
of the initial state.

     The  fact  is  that the N observations  of the wind velocity at  any  instant
JAt, say,  do not uniquely determine the velocity distribution at that  moment.
Rather,  these  measurements,  specifically  (11-76,   77),  together with the
continuity  equation  (11-74) define  a hyperplane  in the phase  space  of  wind
velocity.   Each  point  on  this  plane  represents an  entire  vector function
[u(x,JAt),  v(x,JAt)], xeD.  We pointed out in  Section  6  of  Part  1 that  each  of
                                    240

-------
these  functions  in a  possible  description of the actual  velocity  field that
existed  at  the moment  t=JAt that the observations contained  in  Eqs.  (11-76)
and (11-77) were made.   If we had to choose from this set of possible velocity
functions the  one  that we thought described the flow that actually existed at
the moment  the observations  were made, our choice would be guided by whatever
previous wind data we had seen for the region in question and on our knowledge
of the nature of atmospheric motion generally.  On this basis we would declare
many of  the possible functions to be "unlikely" descriptions because they have
characteristics  that  are incompatible with our  knowledge.   For example,  even
though  all  functions  in  the set satisfy  the  observations  and the  continuity
equation  (11-74)  exactly,   some contain  hurricane  force  winds between  the
observation  stations;   some  contain  intense  vortices  and jets;  and so  on.
However,  even  after  all  these  are  dismissed,  there  remains  a  virtually
infinite  set  of functions  no one  of which  can  be  ruled  out as a plausible
description of the actual flow.

     This suggests  that we  should  assign to each point  on the hyperplane of
possible  flow  descriptions  a weight  p,  say, whose magnitude  is  a  measure of
our conviction that that  particular  function  is the  one  that describes the
flow field  that existed  when the  observations  were  made  (at time JAt).  To
those bizarre  functions mentioned above, we  would assign the weight p=0; and
to the  remainder of the points  on  the hyperplane of  possible descriptions we
would assign weights l>p>0.  Without going  into details,  we point out that the
weight p  is synonymous with the  "probability" of occurrence of the  flow  field
to which the p is assigned (see  Lamb, 1983c).
                                    241

-------
     The  problem  is  to  formulate  a  quantitative  rule  for  assigning  the
weights.   Clearly,  we  cannot examine  every function  on  the  hyperplane  of
possible,  flows  and assign  it a  weight subjectively.  We need  a  mathematical
procedure.

     In Lamb  (1983c)  several  approaches to this problem are  proposed.   It is
shown in  that paper that in effect the method  that  has been employed to date
in  both diffusion and  meteorological  modeling studies  has been  to  assign a
zero value of p  to all  of the  possible  flows  except one and to assign the
value p=l to that  single function.   This is equivalent to declaring that we
know the  correct description  of the  flow field at t=JAt  without any doubt.
This "correct"  description is obtained using one of  the  so-called objective
analysis  formulas.   But  many  such  formulas  exist — no formula  of this type
can  be  universally valid —  and therefore  it is illogical  to  label any one
                   •s.
description of the flow the "correct" description.  The point is that there is
no scientific basis whatever for assigning unit weight to only one function in
the set of possible flows and zero weights to all others.

     One  rational  method  of assigning  p  is  the  following.    It  has been
theorized  that  in 2-D fluids kinetic  energy  is  partitioned among the spatial
fluctuations  in  the flow in  proportion to |jk|  , where k  is the wave  number
vector  of the  fluctuation.   To a  large   extent  this  theory is  supported by
measurements  of  kinetic energy in the free atmosphere.  Thus,  let Q  represent
the manifold  in  velocity phase space  of  functions whose Fourier  transform is
consistent  with  an  energy  spectrum  of  the  form E(ik)  ~ | jk |   .   And  let  Q
represent  the manifold  formed by the  intersection of Q and  the  hyperplane of
possible  flow descriptions.   We  now advance the  hypothesis:
                                    242

-------
                              q(v), if v eQ;
          p(v(x,JAt),X£D) =-j    ~      ~                              (ll-78a)
                              0   , otherwise

where l>q(v)>0  is  a  function  of the entire  velocity  field v(x,JAt),  xeD that
we  have  yet to specify.  Hypothesis  (ll-78a)  is simply a statement  of  our a
priori belief that the description of the true velocity field at time  JAt is a
member of the  subset Q of the  hyperplane  of possible flows.   Observations of
the  flow  field at  times  following  JAt  and  observations  of  the  rate  of
dispersion of  material  in the flow might force us a posteriori to reject this
hypothesis.

     To supplement (ll-78a) we might advance the following hypothesis:

                     "                                                (ll-78b)
where E  is  the kinetic energy of the  flow field v integrated over the entire
model  domain  0.   In  practice one  can treat  only  a  finite  number of  the
velocity fields  contained  in Q.   For example,  in  accordance  with (ll-78b) we
might select,  say,  the 20  members of Q that contain the least kinetic energy,
namely the 20 points in Q closest to the origin of the phase space; and assign
p values to  each using (ll-78b) and the constraint that the sum of the 20 p's
be unity.

     In  hypothesis  (ll-78a,b),  and  in the  conventional  approach  discussed
earlier, consideration is  given  only to the observations  made  at the single
time JAt.   However,  observations made  after  JAt provide valuable information
that can be used by way of  the  momentum equation  (11-72)  to obtain a better
approximation  of the  probabilities  p  of  the flow fields  at JAt than we can
                                    243

-------
obtain  from  empirical-theoretical  considerations  alone.   To  implement  this
approach requires rather complicated  dynamic  programming procedures.   We plan
to utilize this method in the "second generation".regional .model.

     For the present we  shall  replace Eq.  (11-72)  with the much simpler,  and
much weaker,  diagnostic constraint
        I
          dx = C(t)                                            (11-79)
        D

where C(t)  is  the circulation around the perimeter of  the modeling region D.
This equation  is  a statement of Gauss' theorem.  We  will  derive estimates of
C(t)from observed winds and treat it as a known function of time.

     We  see  from  (ll-30a)  that  Eq.  11-79  is  a  constraint  on the  stream
function, and  hence on A (See 11-71).   Substituting (ll-30a) into (11-79) and
making use  of  (11-71)  and Stoke' s theorem, we can express (11-79) in terms of
the transform  of the stream function:

                        ik L      ik L     k2  k2
                 A(k)[(e  x x-l)(e  y y-D( Vky )3dk dkv = c(t)      (11-80)
                                             KxKy     x  y

Thus, the  initial  version of processor Pll will  be based on the equation set
          Eq. (11-81)
          Eq. (11-74)
          Eq. (11-76)
          Eq. (11-77)
                                                                        (11-81)
                                     244

-------
Each  solution  set [A (Ik),  B^jk)] derived from  (11-81)  yields layer averaged
winds  [,  ] through the  following  equations,  whose origin
is (11-29):
                                                   i k*x
           = —!-»\\ C-kvAJ(jk) + k RJ(J$)]e ~ ~dk + u(JAt)
                            -09
                            00
                                  i         i     ik-x
           = -  2UCkxA(JS) + kyB(JS)]e ~ ~dk + v(JAt)      (ii-82b)
                           -00
In  the first  generation model  we  will  derive between  ten and  twenty  flow
fields  from (11-81,  82)  for each  hour of  the  model  simulation  period   and
assign  weights  p to  each using  hypothesis  (11-78) above.   Let  us  call  this
finite  ensemble  of flow  fields 'at  hour  t=JAt W3.  (We  should  add  that even
though  the  members  of VT are not explicitly related to those of W , KAJ, due
to  our replacing  the momentum  equation  (11-72)  with the  simple diagnostic
expression (11-79), there is implicit coupling of these ensembles by virtue of
the fact that each of them is defined in terms of the actual winds observed at
each hour.)  We  generate a corresponding finite ensemble C of concentrations
(containing ,M=10 to 20 members) associated with a given emissions distribution
S(x,t), xeD,  0 <  t<  T,  by  "driving" the dispersion model  with M wind fields
[, ]  , xeD,  J=0,l,. . . JMAX, u=l,...M.   Each  of the M flow
fields  is  created by  selecting  a  and  a    at random from
the ensembles W   for  each hour J=1,...JMAX  in the period of  interest.  Either
ensemble mean  values   of  the concentration  or the  frequency distribution of
concentration or  any   other  statistical quantity  of interest can be computed
                                    245

-------
directly  from  the  ensemble  C  for  any  desired receptor  sites  and times.
Details will  be presented  in  a future  report.   (See  also  Lamb 1983 a,b,c).

     Below we outline  the basic structure of Processor Pll which utilizes the
techniques described above  to  compute the layer  averaged  winds .   for each
of the regional  model's three layers.  Winds are determined for  Layers 2 and 3
at all  hours  and in Layer 1 during  the  day only.  The  nighttime air flow in
                       •
Layer 1 is simulated in Processor P7 and passed into Processor Pll  in  the form
(VI_JV|_) f°r amalgamation with the flow fields computed here.
                                     246

-------
STAGE UV11

     This stage  computes  layer averages of the measured  winds  aloft that are
used  as  the observations  in solving Eq. (11-76) and  (11-77).  Consider first
the calculations required for Layer 3.

(1)  At  each of the  M upper air weather stations compute  the  layer averaged
     horizontal wind components as follows:
                                                       m=l,2,...M
                                                       mode 0 and
                                                                       (11-83)
                                                       mode 1
where  u  and v are the  measured wind profiles.  Since  the  input winds (u, v)
are in z coordinates, it will be necessary to  transform them to p coordinates,
e.g., u(x.p,t), using the pressure-height function p_(z,t).
        ~in                                           in

(2)  Since  the  bottom  surface of Layer 2  is pvs in mode 1 and p1 in mode 0,
     the corresponding expression for the Layer 2 observed  winds  is
                                     247

-------
                       -   1-
                                                                      (11-84)
                                                      mode 0 and
                          x.t)  .   mode !;
                                                                      (11-85)
(Recall  that mode 1 applies  when Ap^=l,  and mode 0 applies when Ap,=0.)

(3)  Processor Pll is not used in  Layer 1 during mode 1 conditions.  In that
     case  the flow  field  in  Layer 1  is generated  in  P7.   During  mode 0
     conditions,   the  depth  of  Layer  1  is  set  in  P7  to  a value  that  is
     approximately the top of the  shear layer.  Assuming, then,  that the flow
     speed and direction in  Layer 1 are  roughly  uniform we adopt  the following
     expressions  for no ,:
                      "* UD , j.
                                                                       (11-86)
                                        mode ° only
     where  x^,  n=l,...N  are the  sites of the  N surface weather  stations.
            ~n      '

(4)  Optional.   In order  to  supplement the sparse upper air data on which the
     observations in  Layers  2  and 3 are based, we define the following "shear
     functions" for  use  in  estimating  the flow in Layer 2  over surface wind
     stations.
                                    248

-------
                      <"(&,»t)>OBt2
                               'm>  '         I     BF1....H
                                                                       (11-87)
u(.xm,p.lc
  ~m  VS-"r  •'  •       '     BF1....H
                                                  mode 0 only
                             ^•n't).^
In mode 0,  p    coincides with the ground  surface  and  hence the function
is  the ratio  of  the  measured  vertically averaged wind  in  layer  2 to  the
observed wind at ground level.

     Next we  interpolate values of 2  and  2  at each of  the  N surface
stations  from the  values  given by  (11-87)  for  the  rawin station  sites  as
follows:
                          M
                             g-ii	2  rnm                             (11-88)
where

          W^rnm^ = ^xn"xm^ + ^rf^^"1'                            (11-89)
A  similar  operation yields  2-    We  can  now define  pseudo  Layer 2 winds
over each surface station as follows
                                                 mode 0 only.          (11-90)
          OB)2 = 2v(xn,t)     optional

This optional method of supplementing the upper air data can be implemented as
desired.
                                    249

-------
Stage PHLOB

     This portion of Processor  Pll  solves  the equation set.(11-81)  to obtain
members of the  flow  field ensemble.   When a  surface  inversion  is not present
(mode  0),  this  stage  computes  averaged winds  for all  three  layers of  the
model.  Otherwise (Mode  1)  simulations  are performed only for layers 2 and 3,
and the corresponding Layer 1 flow is assigned the values

                = v,    -J
                 1       VL    I   mode 1
               1 = VL   J

where  yi  and wi  are the  wind components  in  the cold inversion  layer
generated  by  Processor  P7  at  each  grid cell  and  at  each  hour  that  the
inversion (mode 1) exists.
     The input  requirements  of Processor Pll are summarized in Table 11-1 and
its outputs are listed in Table 11-2.   Processor  Pll and its interfaces with
the processor network are illustrated in Figure 11-2.
                                    250

-------
              Table 11-1  Input Requirements of Processor Pll and
                          Their Sources
Variable
P3(x,t)
p«(x,t)
p (x,t)
Description
top surface of Layer 3 in pressure
(mb) coordinates
same as above, except top of Layer 2
pressure (mb) at the virtual
Source
P8
P8
P7
                           surface

     t)                  top surface of Layer 1 in pressure           P7
                           (mb) coordinates

u(xm,z,t)                observed east-west wind speed component      PI
                           (m/sec) at rawin  station m(=l,...M)
                           at hour t at elevation z(m MSL)

vCx^z.t)                same as above, except north-south            PI
                           wind component

u(x ,t)                  observed east-west wind component            P3
                           (m/sec) at surface station
                           n(=l,...N) at hour t

v(x ,t)                  same as above, except north-south            P3
                           wind component

p (z,t)                  pressure (mb) at elevation z                 PI
 m
                           (m MSL) over rawin  station
                           m(=l,...M) at hour t.
<5(x,t)>2                average,horizontal wind divergence           P8
                           (sec  ) in Layer 3 in grid cell
                           centered at x at hour t.

<6(x,t)>2                Same as <6>3 except applies to Layer 2       P8

<5(x,t)>,~               Same as above except applies to Layer 1      P8

v.                Average east-west wind component in          P7
                           Layer 1 during mode 0 (generally night-
                           time) hours (m/sec)

V|                  Same as above except north-south wind      P7
                           component
                                    251

-------
                     Table 11-2  Outputs  of Processor Pll
     Variable                           Description

3                Vertically averaged wind (m/sec) in Layer 3 at
                           grid cell centered at x at hour t (east-west
                           component)            ~


2                same as above,  except north-south wind component


   >$,t)>2                Vertically averaged wind (m/sec) in Layer 2 at grid
                           cell centered at x at hour t (east-west component)


   *.,t)>2                same as above,  except north-south wind component


.                Layer 1 averaged wind (m/sec) in grid cell centered
                           at x at hour t (east-west component)


                         same as above,  except north-south wind component
                                    252

-------
YYYYYY
                       o -n
                       •Si
                       0) U.
                       2-S g
                       O l
                          o)
                          0)
                       CQ u (/)
                       ^ CI c
                       •*  ss
                       •o o> ~
                       C CD w
                       O 5 03

                       ill
                       o o c
                       CM —
                       0. 
-------
                                  SECTION  11
                                 PROCESSOR P12

DEVELOPMENT
     Processor P12 calculates parameter fields  required in  the description of
interfacial material  fluxes  between Layer  0  and  Layer 1 and  between  Layer 1
and Layer  2.   It  also provides  estimates  of the horizontal  eddy diffusivities
in all  layers.   The  mathematical  expressions for  the parameters we  require
were  presented  in  Part  1  of  this  report.    Below  we   provide   detailed
descriptions of the implementation of these expressions and  further commentary
on their meanings and origin.   The discussion is divided by  stages just as the
calculations within P12 are divided.
Stage K
     This  stage  computes   estimates   of  the  horizontal  eddy  diffusivity
K (I,J,t ) at each  grid point (I,J) at each  hour t ,  for each of the model's
three layers n  = 1, 2, and  3.   Here eddy diffusivity refers to the action of
the small scale wind fluctuations generally associated with turbulence.  These
include wind fluctuations  generated by wind  shear  at  the earth's surface and
across  the  top  of the  mixed  layer,  and  lateral  fluctuations  induced by
convective  thermals, principally  at the top of the  mixed layer  and at the
ground.   (The   effects  of  small  scale  vertical  fluctuations  are  handled by
parameters.like W,  that we consider  later.)

                                     254

-------
     It is  important  to keep in mind the  role  that the eddy diffusivity will
play  in  the regional  model.   In conventional  studies, the  magnitude  of the
horizontal  diffusivity controls the  rate  at which'a plume  expands  about its
"centerline"   and   this  in   turn   affects  the   magnitude   of  the  "mean"
concentration  that  the  model  predicts.    In  the  present  model  the  eddy
diffusivity plays a lesser role.  As we discussed in Part 1, Chapter 7,  and in
the  description  of Processor  Pll  in  this  report,  the  regional  model will  be
applied to  simulation of the ensemble averaged  concentration.   This requires
the model to  be  run a number of times, each time using a different flow field
[n,    ]   from  the  ensemble  of  flow  fields  described  in  Processor Pll
following (11-77)  but using the  same eddy diffusivity K   in each case.   The
results of  all the  individual  simulations are eventually superposed to  arrive
at the  ensemble  averaged  concentration  properties.  In  the  case  of a point
source  plume,  the  superposition of  the  individual  realizations  within the
ensemble might appear as shown in Figure 12-1.  Note that K  controls the rate
of expansion of  the plume in each realization, but the spatial variability of
the wind  fields  within the flow ensemble  are what govern the envelope of the
superposed  results  and hence it is these  larger scale  variations in the flow
that dominate  the ensemble mean concentration.   In this  case it can be  shown
that K  affects the mean square concentration.  This in turn  affects the  rates
of second-order chemical reactions and also the expected deviation of the mean
concentration the model predicts from the actual  concentration values that one
might measure.

     Another way of viewing the role of the eddy  diffusivity in the regional
model  is   to  consider  that  between  the  largest   turbulent   fluctuations
represented  by  the  diffusivity  K  and   the  smallest  perturbations  in the
                                    255

-------
subsynoptic flow  that our network  of wind sensors can  resolve,  there lies  a

range of  "mesoscale"  wind fluctuations  that are not  accounted for either  in

the K's.. or in the "transport  flow".   And it is  these fluctuations that give

the ensemble averaged plume the width I illustrated in Figure 12-1.
                                                         ENVELOPE01 ENSEMBLE
                                                           AVERAGE PLUME (I)
                            CENTERLINE OF ENSEMBLE  PLUME WIDTH (o),
                                 AVERAGE PLUME    CONTROLLED BY K%


                                CENTERLINE OF PLUME
                                 IN ONE REALIZATION

  Figure 12-1.
Illustration of the superposition of  five  hypothetical
realizations of an ensemble of point  source  plumes.   The
width I of the ensemble of plumes is  controlled by the
character of the flow field ensemble.   The width a of the
plumes in the ensemble is controlled  by the  turbulent,  eddy
diffusivity K.
     On_ the  basis  of  the  points  raised  above,  we expect  that  the values

assigned  to  K_  in the  regional  model  will  directly  affect the  mean square

concentration values  more  than the  mean.   However, they may have a significant

indirect effect  on  the mean concentration through the influence that they will

have on  photochemical  reaction  rates.    We can  only   determine through test
                                     256

-------
calcuations  just how large  these  effects can be.  For  now we will postulate
simple  forms for the  lateral  diffusivities  K   that we can  use  in the first
generation model.
     Lacking  a  firm basis on which to  estimate  the eddy diffusivity, we will
use heuristic arguments to formulate expressions for K .  Our first assumption
is  that  the  lateral  eddy  diffusivity  is  effectively zero  during' nighttime
hours  when  convection  is  absent  and/or stable  stratification damps  shear
generated  velocity  fluctuations.   Our second assumption  is that  during the
day, convection  is the primary source of horizontal wind fluctuations.  Let D
be the  horizontal  scale of convective cells, or rolls, and let H be the depth
of  air  in  which  the convection  is  confined (usually by  a stable  layer an
elevation  H  above the  ground).   We  will  base  our parameterization  on the
concept  that  convective circulations  have a toroidal shape with rising motion
along the axis of  the toroid, outward horizontal motion along the top, sinking
motion  along  the  outer surface of the toroid,  and  horizontal  motion at its
bottom directed in toward the axis.  In this picture the outer diameter of the
toroid  is D and its height is H.  If the circulation were indeed this simple,
then a particle would receive a horizontal displacement of order D in the time
At  required  for  the  particle  to  traverse the depth H of  the circulation.

     We imagine that each convection toroid is surrounded by others and that  a
particle in any one toroid can escape into an adjacent one during the  time the
particle  is moving  downward  along the outer edges  of the  toroid  or during
times when  the convective  cell is dying.   If  these migrations of particles
from one cell to another occur at  random, then as a rough approximation we can
treat them  as a  classical  random walk process.   In this  case the effective
                                    257

-------
diffusivity K is

          K - D2/At.                                                     (12-1)
(Incidentally, the random walk  and  the gradient transfer,  or K theory,  models
of diffusion are essentially equivalent.)

     It has been found in empirical  studies of dry convection in the planetary
boundary layer that D - 1.5H.   If we represent the transit  time At by

          At = H/W,                     .                                (12-2)
where W  is  a characteristic velocity scale of  the  convective motion,  then we
get from (12-1) and (12-2)

          K ~ WH                                                        (12-3)

which we could  have  guessed at the outset  on purely dimensional grounds.   In
dry convection W = WA, where

          w* = (HQg/0)1/3                                               (12-4)
where Q is the kinematic heat flux at the ground and 6 is the mean temperature
in the mixed layer.   When cumulus clouds  are present (moist convection), the
appropriate  measures  of W and  H  are  unknown.  In  this  initial  work we shall
assume that when convective clouds are present
where w  is the average upward air speed within clouds and

          H = H2 + H3                                                    (12-5)
                                    258

-------
where FL is  the  depth of the convective  layer  below cloud base and H3 is the
depth  of the  layer  occupied by  clouds.   These estimates  will  be  tested  in
future studies.

     Based on  the  considerations presented above, we  propose  the  expressions
summarized  in  Table  12-1 for  the  diffusivities  K   in  each  of  the  model's
layers.
Horizontal
Diffusivity
V.J.V
Kjd.J.V
K30 <0 and <0 and
CTC = 0 
-------
The relationships between H£  and H, and the thickness h  of the model  layers,
which are inputs to P12, are as follows:

          H2 = hl * h2                                                 (12-6a)
          H3 = h3 .                                                     (12-6b)
In Table  12-1,  a  is the fraction of the  sky covered by cumulus clouds  in a
given  grid cell at  a given  hour.   The velocity  w (i,j,t  )  required in  the
expressions  for K  is an input  parameter  to processor P12; and w*  should be
computed by
             = (H2Qg/90)1/3                                             (12-7)
where H^  is  given by (12-6a); Q is the surface heat flux, an input parameter;
              -2
g  = 9.8m  sec  ;  and  eQ  is  the  surface temperature  interpolated  from  the
surface  virtual   temperature  measurements T    as  follows  (compare  with  Eq.
7-108)
                          n=l
where
          rn = C(iAx-xn)2 + (jAy-y^2]15                                 (12-9)

and (x  ,y )  are  the coordinates of  surface  weather station n.  The values  of
w* obtained from (12-7) will be needed again in stage WW1 below.
     The  input  and  output  requirements  of Stage  K are  summarzied in Table
12-2.
                                     260

-------
Stage WWO
     Here we  calculate  parameters  \+,  w+,  w_ and u associated with turbulence
phenomena in  Layer 0 and on the surface H  that separates Layers  0  and 1.   The
definitions of these parameters were developed in Part 1.
     First we compute the vertical velocity variance on surface  H
where
          •5. -
= h0/L
 m
Of.
                         mj
               2/3
                         "%
          fm =
                 (l -164)    , if 4 < 0;
                  i + 54     , if 4 > o
                 0.4 [0.4 + 0.6exp(44)],  if | < 0;
                 o.4 [1.0 * 3.4| - 0.254],  if 4 > 0.
                                                           (12-10)
                                                                       (12-11)
                                                                       (12-12)
and  u*  is the  friction  velocity.   In  Eqs.  (12-10) -  (12-12),  the  variables
o  , u^, and 4 are all functions of (i,j,t ).
     Next we approximate the time derivative of h  by
          h0(i,j,tffl) = [h0(i,j,tm) - h^lj.v
where At =  3600 sec is the time  interval  at which fv and  other  variables  in
                                                     o
the processor network are available.
                                    261

-------
     With these preliminary variables computed at each  grid point and hour t
we can now calculate the following output parameters  (see  Eqs.  8-10,  8-12,  ai
8-13 of Part 1).           .
                               h00',j,tm)
                                            )]                          (12-1<
where erf is defind by
                           2
          erf(x) =-£ fe"X dX.                                         (12-16
                   V* J
                       awn      fin      h"          hn
          w+(U,V =-r2 «p(-A-) - f [i-erf(-a-)]               (12-17
                      V2H       2awo    Z         V2awo
where aWQ, given by (12-10), and hQ, given by (12-14),  are functions  of
          w_(i,j,tra) = n0(i,j,tm) + w+(i,j,tm)                         (12-18

          v(i,j,tm) = u*(i,j,tm)                                       (12-19;
The  parameter  v is the  entrainment velocity of ambient air  into  plumes fror
surface emissions  and is discussed in detail  in  Chapters  5 and 8  of Part 1.

     At this point it is advantageous to determine  the values of the cumulus
flux partition  parameter 4* defined in Part 1, Eq. 5-44.  Interim values ¥' ol
this parameter  were developed in Processor P8, but  we must test whether the>
satisfy criterion  (5-47) of Part 1, namely
                                    262

-------
              w A (l-0Tn)
          v|»'<  * +     IU                                               (12-20)
                  c c
where w+ and A+ are the parameters that we just computed in (12-17)  and 12-15)
above, and where
          V,. = - 4-r - ffl/A8                                         (12-21)
           c      l-ac    9

(see  Eq.  5-45  of Part 1).   All of  the  variables  in (12-20,  21)  are functions
of  space  and time  and each  of  them,  except w+  and A+)  is an  input to  this
processor.  Consult Table 12-2 for definitions.

     To  obtain  the  final   values  of ¥  for  output to  the  model, proceed  as
follows.  First, at each  grid point (i,j)  and at  each  hour t  compute the
variable  V(i,j,t)  defined  by (12-21)  using  the  input fields w2(i,j,tj,
                 m                                                         ni
w (i,j,t ),  etc.  Next, compute
          V'Ti i t ) =        ,  .   .  .  .      	—             (12-22)
          ¥(1'J'V        a^i.j.t^d'.j.tj                       ^Z2Z)

where w+ and X+ are from (12-17) and (12-15)  and OVQ and a  are inputs to this
processor.  Finally, we have

          Y(i,j,tffl) = «1n{f'(IJ.t^.rd.J.t^)}                       (12-23)

where V  is the interim estimate of  V  that  is input  from  processor  P8.   The
values of V should be recorded in the model input file MIF.   This parameter is
also required in the next stage of this processor.
                                    263

-------
     Parameter summaries for Stage WWO are given  in Table 12-2.
Stage WW1
     This stage computes  the parameters  w,,  w,  ,  and WQ,  (defined in Part 1,
Chapter  4)  that are  associated with  material  fluxes across surface  H,.  To
compute  these  quantities we  must  first  define several auxiliary parameters.
          wn;i(i»J»'tlJ = vertical velocity at level z., during neutral and
                       unstable conditions (input from P8)
                         0.6w*(i,j,y  if Ui,j,tm) < 0;
                         0  , if UU,tm) > 0
                                                                     (12-24)
                                                    ,-1
          zjdj.v =  cz^uiv - z1(i,j,tra.1)](At)-
where                                                                (12-25)
where At  =  3600  sec  is  the  time  interval  at  which  h, and  hQ  values are
available.
     Let wm be the solution  of the following transcendental  equation:
                                       i
                         _   2   —              —
          ff ,       (w - *„,)   w.:,        wm- w^      ^w,.
          J-i exp [-  m   D1 ] * -Si Ci-erf(-i«2i)] = ::£_£
                     2aJ         Z         /2awl       1-aTl
                       wl                     W                       (12-26)
                                    264

-------
where erf(x) is defined by  (12-16), ¥  is  from (12-23),  etc.   (Note that awl,

*D1' ^' ac' *cf CTT1  and hence wm are a11 functions of (i,j) and tm).   Now let
At each grid point (i,j) and each hour tm compute
                                                                      (12-27)
                              +    C1 +
                          °T1   L
                                                wl
                             i.j.y  , if Ui,j,tm) > 0;
                                                                      (12-28)
                                "m     ^*
                                   erf(-51) , if L(i,j,tm) < 0
                                         'wl
                         nvs(i,J,tm)  , if Ui,j,tm)> o.
                                                                      (12-29)
                                     , if U1,j,tn) < 0;
                                          i,j,tm)  , if
                                          i,.i.t_)  > 0.
                                                                      (12-30)
                                    265

-------
     To evaluate the function  erf  in (12-28 and 12-29)  in  the limit as awl -»
0, the following procedure should be used.

          if awl = 0,  erf (——) = SIGN(A)-1                          (12-31)
                              awl
This condition should be encountered only rarely since a - = 0 when L > 0 (see
Eq. 12-24)  and in this  case W, and W...  have  the forms given  in  (12-28)  and
(12-29) that do not involve the error function.

     The  input  and output  requirements  of Stage WW1 are summarized  in Table
12-2.    The  processor  and  its  interfaces  with  the processor  network  are
illustrated in Figure 12-2.
                                    266

-------
                    Table 12-2  Input and output variables  of each
                                stage of Processor P12.
 Input
Variable
                Description
                                 Source
                               Stage
  Output
 Variable
Description
hxd.j.y
thickness (m) of
Layer 1 in cell
(i,j) at hour t
                             m
                                    P7
K-iO'.Jit )     horizontal   eddy
 x      m      diffusivity (nT/sec)
               in Layer 1, cell  (i,j
               hour t_
                                                                           m
ho(i,j,t )    thickness (m) of      P8
        m     Layer 2

h,(i,j,tm)    thickness (m) of      P8
 J      m     Layer 3
                                         Ko(i,j,tm)
                                          ^      m
                                                »_
                                                 m
                                                                     same as K, except
                                                                     Layer 2  x

                                                                     same as K, except
                                                                     Layer 3  *
              fraction (0
-------
                                   Table 12-2 (Continued)
 Input
Variable
                Description.
Source    Stage
                                                        Output
                                                       Vari ab 1 e
                                    Description
uu.V
              Obukhov  length  (m)
              in cell  (i,j) at
              hour t

 P4
                                              WWO
                                            (cont.
                                  average speed (m/
                                  of  fluid moving u
                                  relative to surfa
              thickness (m)
              of  Layer 0 in
              cell  (i,j) at
              hour  t
                   m
                                    P7
                                  same as w+ except
                                  speed of downward
                                  moving fluid
                                                                    entrainment veloc
                                                                    (m/sec) of plumes
                                                                    in  Layer 0
               fraction (0
-------
                                    Table 12.2  (Concluded)
 Input
Variable
            Description
                     Source
Stage
 Output
Variable-
Description
              vertical velocity
              (m/sec) on
              surface H, in
              neutral and
              unstable conditions
                                   P8
                               WW1
                        vertical  velocity
                        parameter (m/sec)
                        on surface HI

                        vertical  velocity
                        parameter (m/sec)
                        on surface H,
w*(i,j,t )    convective velocity   Stage K
        m
              scale (m/sec)
h-,(i,j,t )    thickness (m) of      P7
        m     Layer 1 at (i,j,tm)
             thickness (m) of
             Layer 0
                                    P7
                                                                     vertical  velocity
                                                                     (m/sec) on surface
                                                                     H, due to horizontal
                                                                     divergence in the
                                                                     flow field.
LCU.V
«Ki,J,t )
  (i.j.t )
Obukhov length
scale (m) in cell
            t.
             m
cumulus flux
partition function
(dimensionless)

fraction (0<0 <1)
of sky coverea by
cumulus clouds in
cell (i,j) at hour
                                    P4
                                    Stage
                                    WWO
                                    RAW
w (i,j,t )   cumulus updraft
 c      m    velocity scale
             ^m/sec)

dT1(i,j,t)  fraction (0
-------
YYYYYYYYYIY
                    3
                    Q.

                    3
                    O
                    •a
                    c
                    CO
                    a
                    c
                    l
                    5! 8
                    n- 8
                    te w
                    O o
                    (A L.
                    (o a.
                    ® a>
                    c'1
                    Is
                    2 S
                    ^s *•
                    11
                    2

                    O)
         270

-------
                                  SECTION 12
                                 PROCESSOR P15
DEVELOPMENT
     Processor P15 computes deposition resistances r and deposition velocities
P  for  those  pollutant species for which  empirical  data are available.   These
parameters are  related  through the friction velocity  u*,  which  is a function
of local wind speed.  To avoid coupling this processor to processor Pll, which
computes the flow fields, we will use friction velocity estimates based on the
"raw"  surface  wind  observations, namely those  generated by  P3, which  are
available in the PIF.  These "raw" values constrain the magnitudes of the wind
velocities  generated  by  Processor  Pll;  consequently,  any  inconsistencies
between deposition  velocity  estimates based on the u* values derived from the
raw data and those  implied by the output of Pll are most likely much smaller
than the level  of uncertainty in the  empirical  relationship between p and u*
that we employ here.
Step 1
     Compute deposition  resistances  for each pollutant species.  In this task
we must  adopt a numbering  convention for the pollutants.   In  Part 1 of this
report, we  initiated  the convention that  species  NO is pollutant  "1"; N02 is
pollutant  "2";  and  03  is pollutant  "3".   Beyond  this  the  numbering  is
unspecified and  one is free to select whatever system  is  convenient.  In this
                                    271

-------
Processor description we  will  refer to all pollutants other than NO, N02, and
Oq by their  names  and leave the assignment of numbers to them as a task to be
performed.during the implementation phase of this.work.

     The  deposition  resistance r(x,t;a)  (sec/m) for  species  a averaged over
the NEROS grid cell centered at x at hour t is assumed to be
                     10              10
          r(x,t;a) = Z T(x,n)r (cr,L)/I T(x,n)                           (15-1)
                    n=l             n=l
where rn(or,L)  is  the deposition resistance of  species  a over land use type n
during atmospheric conditions characterized by Obukhov length L at hour t.  In
Tables  15-1,  2, and 3 we  list the rR values currently  available for several
pollutants.
       Table 15-1.  Deposition resistances (sec/m) for S02 as a function
                    of land use type n and stability L
                        (From Sheih, et al., 1979)
          n =            L<0          L = »           L>0
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
10

900
100
100
100

100
100
0
0
70
100

900
300
300
300

300
300
0
0
250
300
272
103
3 ~~**
103
103

10
103
VMM*
0
0
800
103


)

> use 0.0 if
[ L > 0 and
RH(x)> 0.9
)






-------
The  surface relative humidity  RH(x,t)  in each cell  can  be interpolated from
the surface station values RH  available from P3 using a weighting scheme like
that employed in Eq. 12-8.
      Table 15-2.  Deposition resistances (sec/m) for ozone as a function
                   of land use type n and stability L.
                            (From Wesely, 1981)

           n=           L<0          L=»          L>0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 lake
ocean
8
9
10
300
70
150
60
150
70 '
104 3
2.10d
0.0
100
100
400
200
200
300
400
300
1<>4 3
2.10J
0.0
250
200
400
400
300
1.5-103
1.5-103
1.5-103
"4 3
2.10^
0.0
300
350
     Resistances for other  pollutant species are not available in the current
literature.  Deposition  velocities for several pollutants  other  than S02 and
03 onto  "vegetation11 were reported by Hill and Chamberlain in 1975 (see Table
6 of McMahon  and Dem"son (1979)), but these pertain to only one land use type
and  moreover,  the  associated  atmospheric  stability  conditions  were  not
specified.  Lacking any  other source of data, we  propose to use the Hill and
Chamberlain data to  estimate the  resistances of each  species relative to 03,
                                    273

-------
and subsequently  to use that estimate and  the  values given in Table  12-2 to
deduce crude estimates  of  resistances.   From the Hill and Chamberlain data we
estimate that  the difference Ar2(a)  between the resistance of species  a and
that of ozone over agricultural  land (n=2) (under unknown conditions of L) are
as follows.
 Table 15-3  Deposition resistances of several  pollutants relative to that of
             ozone over agricultural land.   (Deduced from data of Hill and
             Chamberlain, 1971)
Species
00
°3
SO,
CO
NO
PAN
NO,
Ar2 C=r2(03)-r2(a)](sec/m)
0
+25
<-105
-940
-100
+ 7
If  we  assume  that  these  values  apply  for  L<0,  then  we  can  estimate
r2(PAN,L<0), for example, to be

          r2(PAN,L<0) = r2(3,L<0)-Ar2(PAN)
                      a  70 + 100
                      = 170 sec/m.

One  conflict that  is  readily  apparent with this method  is that the value  of
r2(S02,  L<0) deduced  from Table 12-3 does not  agree  with the value given  in
Table  12-1.    This  discrepancy is   indicative  of  the  wide  scatter  in  the
                                     274

-------
reported deposition  rates  of the various species.   In the interim, we propose
that approximate values of rn(a,L) be derived from the Ar2 method above.   That
is, we assume

          r2(a,L<0) = r2(3,L<0)-Ar2(a)                                  (15-2)

for  species a  =  CO,  NO, ML  and PAN.   The  values  for  the other  land  use
categories  n=l,3,4...10  and other  L values can  be taken as  having  the same
ratio to the n=2,  L<0 values as those given above for ozone.

     The output  of Step  2 should be deposition resistances r(x,a) (sec/m)  for
species a=03,  S02, CO,  NO, N02 and  PAN  for each cell x of the NEROS grid  for
each hour of the simulation period.  These values are used in the next Step to
compute deposition velocities.
Step 2
     Compute the  average  deposition velocity p(x,t;a) (m s  ) of each species
a in each  NEROS grid cell at hour t using the following expression from Sheih
et al.  (1979):
          P(x,t;a) = 0.4u*[ln(2/zo)+ 2.6 + 0.4u*r(x,t;a) - Y^"1        (15-3)

where u* is  the friction velocity (m s  ) in the cell centered at x at hour t
(from P4); ZQ  is  the effective surface roughness (m) for this cell (from P4);
z is the  elevation at which  the  concentration of species a  is  taken for the
purpose of estimating the deposition flux from p (we will use

          z = h AZQ - 10m                                               (15-4)
                                    275

-------
see Part I, Eq.  5-6b);  and the function ?c  is  given by (Sheih et al.,  1979)

                   {0.598 + 0.3901n (-2/L)  -  0.090[ln(-z/L)]2},  if L<0;  (15-5)
               - 5z/L, if L>0;
where L  is  the  Obukhov  length  (m) for the cell  centered at x at  hour t (from
P4).
     The  inputs  and outputs of each  step  of Processor P15 are  summarized  in
Table 15-1;  and the processor  and its interfaces with the processor  network
are illustrated in Figure 15-1.
                                    276

-------
                Table 15-1  Summary of the input and output parameters
                            of each Step of Processor P15.
.nput
'arametier
     Description
Source    Step
Output
Parameter
Description
3Hn(t)
L(x,t)
          fraction of NEROS cell     RAW
          centered at x in land
          use type n, n=l,2,...10.
          (dimensionless)
relative humidity          P3
(dimensionless) at
surface weather station
n at hour t.

Obukhov length (m) in      P4
cell centered at x at
time t.        -
                                             £(x.,t;a)  effective deposition
                                                       resistance (sec/m) of
                                                       cell centered at x
                                                       to deposition of species
                                                       a=0,, NO, N09, etc. at
                                                       hour t.     *
z (x)     surface roughness          P4
          (m) of cell centered
          at x.
             ***

u*(x>t)   friction velocity          P4
          (m/sec) in cell at x
          at hour t.         ~

L(x,t)    Obukhov length (m) in      P4
          cell at x at hour t.
                  s*

r(x,t;a)  deposition resistance      Step 1
          (see Step 1 output).
                                             p(x,t;a)  effective deposition
                                                       velocity (m/sec) of
                                                       species a=02, NO, N02,
                                                       etc., in ceil centered
                                                       at x at hour t. Reference
                                                       level z=10m)
                                         277

-------
        Y
         XI
                                           -~ **
                                           *
                                           in
                                              g
                                           to «
                                           
                                           (0  3  O

                                           111
                                          to



                                           3
                                           OJ
                                          iZ
278

-------
                                  SECTION 13
                            THE B-MATRIX COMPILER

INTRODUCTION
     The  b-matrix  compiler  (BMC)  translates the  variables  generated by  the
network of processors  into  the elements of the  "b-matrix" defined  in Part 1,
Section  9,  and  into the variables  required in  the  transport and  diffusion
terms of  the  T-equation,"  also defined in Part  1, Section  9.   The interface
between the BMC and the processor network is the model  input  file (MIF).   This
is illustrated schematically in Figure 1-1.

     The  mathematical  relationships  among the MIF variables  and  the b-matrix
elements  were  summarized in Appendix  C of Part 1.  A  complicating aspect of
these  relationships  is  that  the  values  of a  small   group  of  the b-matrix
elements  are  dependent on  the local ozone concentration, which  is not known
until during execution  of  the model.  Fortunately, all of the matrix elements
in this group  can  have only one of two predeterminable values, depending upon
the local value of the function U« which is defined as follows:
             _
           0
                0, otherwise
where ?Mn is the local emission rate of NO in Layer 0 and
                                   Spec1es
                                    279

-------
Thus, the BMC must  provide  to  the model  both of the possible  values  of each
b-matrix element that is concentration dependent.  The  appropriate  value can
then be selected during  execution  of the model based on the local value of IL.
In  the  'next section  we present  the expressions  for  each  of  the  b-matrix
elements in terms of the MIF variables.  (Definitions of each variable can be
found in Table  13-1  at the end of  this section.)
THE B-MATRIX ELEMENTS
Let
             H (CTT(faTl)Px "
          ej 5 w.\. -  w+\+(l-|)(l-a)Qx                                  (16-4)
Ozone (03)
                 bn =         *i  + U-<5Vo)J> if uo -i-
                           0                 0          2               (15'5)
                           3+  h  +  Q-a   )fe 3-  (1"q)" tQQ >T  if U  =0
                               nl    u CTTO;teO              3        °
          "12 '
          b13 = 0                                                      (16-7)
                  ^      (l-aTO)(l-n)uSNO
                 9103        h1OQ + u)
                                    280

-------
 Nitric  oxide  (NO)
"ll • th*  l  *  a-aTO)(e0-  a. 0£Q  )]                (16-9)
                         l       TO0

                 J.                           rNO
          b!2 = H
          b!3 =
                 QINO - SNO 'Vr  1f uo =
                     » if
               —  AHV

where
               . £NO .

               -S                 uS
Nitrogen dioxide (N02)
                                     NO                               (16-13)




                   °                                                  (16-14)
                              'u ^'                                 (16-15)
          b     1   N02

          bl1 - Hfew
                 •*•
          b!2 - K^Tl^lm                                           (16-15)




          b13 * 0                                                      (16-16)





               TgiNO  + SNO <03>i ' 1f Ut
            =    1N°2    N0£  3 1       o

           1    ' n**     U  = 0
                91N02 ' Uo   °'
                                   281

-------
where

                 NO
         glN00  2 Sl    * h.. o"  + u)  u5NO,                       .   (16-18)
             L            1   NQ2          2.




                  N02    (l-CTTO)(l-a)u


               5 Sl   +    h,(f3Mn + u) (5NO
          g1NO =
              2
species y  (excluding 03, NO and N02)
          b22 = H
                       r  (W2-W

                       c
          b!2 =   ^-"Tl^lm


          b13 = 0         '                                           (16-23)
                 V        i II         ^w


          «1X = Sl  *   h^u^p)    uSX                                (16'24)




all species





          b9i = \  (1'°n)(wi'l«'i»'Wm)                                (16-25)
           ^i   n2      ii  i  im  ui
          b   = - -La-a ) ^                                        (16"27)
          D23      h,U CTCJ A6
                    Z                                                (16-28)
                                   282

-------
  Ozone  (03)
                                   .  if
           b.3I =<
                                                 = 0.
                                                                     (16-29)
           b33 = H

                                 > 1f Uo = 1:
                 n** = i r     "0

                  30~ h
+ w:3L  if u  = o.
 (16-30)





 (16-31)
 (16-32)
 Nitric oxide (NO)
                           NO
          9n  =
                                   if u  =
                93NO • 1f Uo =
where
           *   =
           3NO
                        NO
(16-33)






(16-34)





(16-35)







(16-36)
(16-37)
                                  283

-------
           n**  -    H II r^
           93NO    h3H3U3C»
                                                          (16-38)
                                                                        (16-39)
 Nitrogen dioxide (N02)
                            NO,
                                                                        (16-40)
           b32 = E
                                                          (16-41)



                                                          (16-42)
                              C0o>i,  if U
                     2    JHU2   31'     0
                       •  1f
                                                                        (16-43)
where
2  "3
                                                                        (16-44)
                 1  .    N°9
           **  - I rij ii /»  2
                                                                        (16-45)
          9
           3N0
                       J3
              2   3N
                                                          (16-46)
                                    284

-------
species x (excluding 03>  NO and N02)
                                                                      (I6.48)
                                                                      (16-49)
where
                 l,  if H,  >  0;
                                                                      (16-51)
                 0,  if H,  <  0.
                          ™~
          M= a  [-f-r + fe/A83                                       (16-52)
                   i CTC

          H3 = dH3/dt                                                 (16_53)
PREPARATION OF TERMS IN THE f-EQUATION

     In  designing   the  algorithm  that  treats  the  advection  and  diffusion
processes, we assumed that these  phenomena could be expressed in the form (see
Eq. 9-5 of Part 1)

                          K                =°                        (1654)
                                    285

-------
Consequently,  the basic  equation 2-29  of  Part  1  must be  cast  in  a  form


compatible with (16-54).  The  only  terms in (2-29) that  are  involved  in this


transformation are
 _

sf
                 3
                 81 nV
                                          8 .
                                      v>
                                             31 nV
                                                                       (16-55)
where u^ =  (a cos 4»)   and |j.  = a   are metric factors and a is the radius of


the  earth.   The  fluctuation quantities  u1,  v1  and  c'  in  (16-55)  represent


deviations of  the value of the given parameter at any point in space from the


local  cell  averaged  value, denoted  by  <  >..   In  Section 7  of Part  1,  we
                                             J

proposed to express the fluxes ., etc. associated with the subgrid scale
                                     «J

fluctations in the gradient transfer form (see Eq. 7-2, Part 1)
. = -K.L
                                                                      (16-56a)
                          a.
                          V
                                                             (16-56b)
where the  K.  are diffusivities specified in Stage K of processor P12.  Making
            J

use of (16-56) in (16-55) we get
                             3K.  3.
       t
                            31nV
                            31nV.      3K.  3.

                             OA     HA O/K J  a/K
                                    286

-------
                   2             2
                  a .
                         '      —    = °                             (16'57)
This  equation  is of the  form  (16-54)  required by the algorithm  in  the model
that  handles  the advection  and diffusion processes  (see Appendix  A  of P7).
Two  basic operations  are now  necessary to complete  the preparation  of  the
equation   for   numerical   solution:   (1)   to  convert   the  units   of  all
parameters  —  the  model  treats  the  equations  in  (A,4>)  space  rather  than
physical  space  (x,y);   (2)  to convert the  effective  advection  velocities,
i.e.,  the  terms in  brackets   in  (16-57), into  coordinates  (\*,*)   of  the
upstream trajectories associated with each grid point in the model  domain (see
Figure 7-A1 of P7).   Below we outline the details of specific operations that
are required.
Step 1
     Four parameter fields are involved in these operations:  the two velocity
components  .   and  .,  the  diffusivites  K-;  and the  cell volumes  V..
               J          J                      J                           J
Values of  each of these are  available  in MIF for each layer  j=l,2,3 and for
each  grid  cell in  the  model domain.   All  data in the MIF  are  in  mks units.
                                                 -1                  2 -1
This means that the units of  and  are m-s  ; K has units of ra s  ; and
V has  units  of m  .   The first task is to convert all length units from meters
to radians.
     This  is  accomplished  using the  metric  factors  u,  and  u.  which  are
measures of the arc angles in radians of longitude and latitude, respectively,
per  unit length  on  the earth's  surface.   Thus,  for example, u,.  ls  tne
east-west component of wind  speed in radians (of longitude) per second.

-------
     Let  (I,J)  denote (column, row)  of any  cell  in the  model  domain.  The
metric factor u.  varies with J,  namely

          ux(J) = (a cos (Dj)"1                                         (16-58)
where *,  is the  latitude  in radians  of row  J,  but  u.  is a constant,  namely

          »l = a"1                                                     (16-59)
where a is the earth's radius:
          a = 6,367,333. meters                                        (16-60)
Now  convert the velocity  and  diffusivity fields obtained  from the MIF  into
their  corresponding values  in (\,) space  for each layer  j=l,2,3 and  grid
point (I,J) as follows:

                                    ,                                   (16-61)
                            ,..,                                     (16.-62)

          KJjd.J) = &ix(I,J)]2KjU.J),                                 (16-63)
          KCia>J) = MJKXI.J).                                        (16-64)
           y j         T j
The  K*. and K*.  fields should be recorded directly  in  the output file of the
     xj       yj
BMC  for input into the model.
Step 2
     Take the natural log of each cell volume V. in each layer at each grid
                                    288

-------
point to produce arrays of (InV.)-   For each layer  j  compute  estimates  of
                               j
 g

g^ InV. at every grid point (I,J) as follows
          ^ InV-d.J) - DXLVd.J.j)  =


                                                                       (16-65)
where
          6\ = \ (35^) = model  grid interval  in A.
On the western boundary where 1=1,  use





          OXLV(I,J,j) = [ln(V(2,J))-ln(V.(l,J))]/6\              .     (16-66)
and on the eastern boundary



          DXLV(IMAX,J,j) = Cln(V..(IMAX,J))-ln(Vj(IMAX-l,J))]/6\        (16-67)





In the same manner define



          4 InVjd.J) -.DYLV(I,J,j) = [InCVjCI.J+l))                  (16.68)
where



                     °~      -id interval  in .                          (16-69)
On  the  south  and north  boundaries, where  J=l  and JMAX, respectively,  use



approximations similar to (16-66) and (16-67) for DYLV(I,J,j).
     Form approximations of the derivatives of K*. and K*. as follows:
                                                xj      yj





          9Kxi
          ^ - DXKXd.JJ) =[K*.(H-1,J)-K*.(I-1,J)]/(25X)


                                                                       (16-70)
                                    289

-------
          3KIi
          gj*l * DYKY(I,J,j) * EKJJ.(I,J+l)-K*j(I,J-l)]/(26)
Use approximations similar to  (16-66)  and  (16-67) to treat grid points on the
boundaries.
Step 4-
     Form  the  effective  advection  velocity components,  i.e.,  the  terms in
brackets in (16-57) as follows.

          ueffd,J,j) = * -  Kjj(I,J)*DXLV(I,J,j)
                         - DXKXd.J.J)                                 (16-71)
          veffd,J,j) = * -  K*.jd.J)*DYLVd,J,j)               (16-72)
                         - DYKY(I,J,j)

Values of  ugff and  vgff  must be computed  for each layer j=l,2,3; each grid
point in the model domain; and each  time step At (= 30  min.).
Step 5
     Compute the  "back track" points  associated with each grid  point  (I,J),
each layer j=l,2,3, and each time step.   This is done as  follows:

          Let ueff d.J.J.N), veff(I,J,j,N) denote the
effective velocity components  ,  (16-71)  and (16-72), at  time  step N,  i.e.,  at
time t=tQ+NAt.   Consider a  given  grid cell  (I,J,j) at  a given  time step  N.
Compute
                                    290

-------
                 ueff (M.J.^AT                                      (16-73)
                      d,J,j,N)AT                                      (16-74)

where AT = At/n, say At = At/3 = 10 minutes.   These increments define a point
(A.O in (A,) space, namely
          A, =
                                                                        (16-75)
     Fit a  biquintic  polynomial  to the (u «,  veff)  values at time step N on
the 36-grid-point square centered at the cell nearest (A,, <)>,).   Note that the
polynomial must be  in terms of (A,<|>) rather than (x,y).  With this polynomial
and  a  linear  interpolation  in .time  between  NAt  and (N-l)At,  estimate the
values of ("eff, veff^ at tne P°int (^.p^) at "time NAt-Ai  , i.e.,
          ueff C^.^.J.NAt-Ai), Veff(\1,(01,j,NAt-AT).

Now compute the new point
          \? = X* + [-u ff (\1,1,j,NAt-AT)AT].

Using  the biquintic  space  approximation and  the  linear  time  interpolation
again to estimate u -- and v  .- at (X-. 4>o' NAt-2Ai), compute  finally
             =) XR  . = LAMBT(I,J,j,N) = \9 + [~u  ,f(\?,4>0,
                 BTj                     Z      eff  Z  *.               (16-77)
                     = PHIBT(I,J,j,N) = «|>2 + [-veff(\2,4»2,j,NAt-2AT)Ai].
These  are the  coordinates  of the  "back  track"  point  associated with  cell
(I,J,J)  at  time  NAt  when  the  subinterval  AT =  At/3.   This is  the  point
indicated by  (x*,  y*)  in Figure 7-A1 of  P7.  Values  of  LAMBT  and  PHIBT should
be  recorded  on the b-matrix  tape,  i.e.,  the output  file of the BMC,  for all
I.J.j and all time steps N=1,...NMAX.
                                     291   '

-------
     The  diffusivlty  fields  K*.  and  K*.  should also  be  recorded on  the
                               xj        yj

b-matrix tape for all I,J,j and all times steps N=1,...NMAX.





     The b-matrix  compiler is  illustrated in Figure  BMC-1,  and each  of  the


variables in the MIF is defined in Table BMC-1.
                                    292

-------
INPUT
(MIF)
BMC
   OUTPUT
("b-matrix" tape)
                                                        ~±   -a
                                                        f) to CO
                                                        •S £• ®
                                                        «2 t- '-
                                                        CQ ^ 
-------
                Table BMC-1.  Definitions of parameters in the
                             Model  Input File (MIF).
Parameter
                    Definition
   n
JTO
JT1
w
                    Thickness of model  layer n,  n=l,2,3.
                    Average east-west wind component in model  layer n=l,2,3.
                    Average north-south wind component in model  layer n=l,2,3.
                    Horizontal eddy diffusivity in model  layer n=l,2,3.
Fraction of the top surface of Layer 0 penetrated by
terrain in a given grid cell.
Fraction of the top surface of Layer 1 penetrated by
terrain- in a given grid cell.
                    Fraction of sky covered by cumulus clouds in a given cell,
                    Plume entrainment velocity in Layer 0.
                    Fraction of Layer 0 occupied by line and point source plumes.
                    Deposition velocity of pollutant species X.
                    Fraction of the top surface of Layer 0 covered by ascending
                    fluid.
                    Mean speed of upward moving fluid on top surface of  Layer  0.
Mean speed of descending fluid on top surface of  Layer  0.
                    Composite vertical turbulence parameter on  top  surface  of
                    Layer 1.
                                    294

-------
                           Table BMC-1. (continued)
Parameter
                                  Definition
'1m
W
 D1
"c

feMe


*
sx
52
 08
                    Composite vertical turbulence parameter on top surface
                    of Layer 1.
                   Mean vertical air velocity on top surface of Layer 1
                   induced by flow divergence in Layer 1.
                    Mean vertical air velocity on top surface of Layer 2.
                   Cumulus updraft velocity scale.
                   Turbulent entrainment velocity at mixed layer top.
                   Fraction of cumulus cloud volume flux drawn from Layer 0.
                    Local time' rate of change of the elevation of the top
                    of Layer 2.
                    Volume flux across top of Layer 3.
                    Emission rate of surface sources of pollutant x.
                    Emission rate of sources of pollutant x in Layer 1.
                   Emission rate of sources of pollutant x  in  Layer 2.
                   Concentration of species x  in air  above  the  top of model
                   Layer 3.
                                    295

-------
                                  REFERENCES


Artoz, M.  A.  and J.  C.  Andre,  (1980):  "Similarity Studies  of Entrainment in
     Convective  Mixed  Layer",   Boundary Layer Meteor..  Vol.  19,  pp  51-66.

Brost, R. and J.  C.  Wyngaard, (1978):   "A Model Study of the Stably Stratified
     Planetary Boundary Layer",  J.  Atmos. Sci.. Vol.  35,  pp 1427-1440.

Bullock, 0. R. (1983): "Spatial  and Temporal Interpolation of NEROS Radiosonde
     Winds",  M.S.  Thesis,  Dept.  of Marine,  Earth and  Atmospheric Sciences,
     N.C. State University, 105 pages.

Demerjian, K.  L., (1983): personal  communication.

Demerjian, K.  L.  and K. L Schere (1979): "Applications of a Photochemical Box
     Model  for Ozone  Air  Quality in  Houston, Texas".   Proceedings,  Ozone/
     Oxidants: Interactions  with the  Total  Environment II, Houston, TX, 14-17
     Oct. 1979, APCA, Pittsburgh, PA,  pp 329-352.

Godowitch,  J.  M.  and  J.  K. S.  Ching (1980):   "Formation and Growth  of the
     Nocturnal Inversion  Layer  at  an  Urban and  Rural  Location",  Proc.  Second
     AMS  Joint  Conference  on Applications  of Air Pollution Meteorology, New
     Orleans, LA, pp 165-172.

Colder,  D.,  (1972):   "Relations  Among  Stability Parameters  in  the Surface
     Layer", Boundary Layer Meteor., Vol. 3, pp 47-58.

Haltiner,  G.  J., (1971): '  Numerical Weather Prediction. John  Wiley and Sons,
     New York, NY..  317 pagesT

Hill, A. C. and E. M. Chamberlain, (1976): "The Removal of Water Soluble Gases
     from  the Atmosphere  by Vegetation", Proc. Symp. on Atmosphere  - Surface
     Exchange of  Particles  and  Gases,  ERDA  Symp.  Series,  NTIS,  pp 153-170.

Holtslag, A.  A.  M.  and A.  P. Van Ulden,  (1983):   "A Simple  Scheme  for Daytime
     Estimates of the Surface  Fluxes  from  Routine  Weather Data", J. Climate
     and Applied Meteor.. Vol.  22, pp 517-529.

Jones,  F.  L., R. W.  Miksad and A.  R.  Laird,  (1981):   "A Simple Method  for
     Estimating  the  Influence   of Cloud Cover  on  the N09  Photolysis  Rate
     Constant", J. Air Poll. Cont. Assoc.. Vol.  31, pp 42-45.

Lamb,  R.  G., (1983a):   "Air Pollution  Models as Descriptors of  Cause-Effect
     Relationships", Atmos.  Envir., (in press).

Lamb,  R.  G.,  (1983b):  "Theoretical Issues  in Long Range  Transport Modeling",
     Preprint Volume, AMS  Sixth Symposium on Turlulerce  and  Diffusion,  Boston,
     Mass., pp 241-244.

Lamb,  R.  G.  (1983c):  "Causality  and Atmospheric  Phenomena" (in  preparation).
                                     296

-------
Lamb, R. G.  (1983d):   "A Regional Scale  (1000 km) Model of Photochemical Air
     Pollution. Part 1: Theoretical Formulation", EPA report EPA-600/3-83-035.
     226 + xi pages.  NTIS-PB83-207688.

McMahon, R.  A. .and P.  J. Denison, (1979):   "Empirical  Atmospheric Deposition
     Parameters - A Survey", Atmos. Environ., Vol. 13, pp 571-585.

Melgarejo, J.  W.   and  J.  W. Deardorff, (1974):   "Stability Functions for the
     Boundary-Layer  Resistance   Laws  Based   Upon  Observed  Boundary-Layer
     Heights", J.  Atmos. Sci.. Vol. 31, pp 1324-1333.

Nieuwstadt, F. T.  M. and H. Tennekes,  (1981):  "A Rate Equation for the
     Nocturnal Boundary-Layer  Height", J. Atmos.  Sci..  Vol. 38, pp 1418-1428.

Sheih, C. M., M. L. Wesely  and B. B.  Hicks, (1979):  "Estimated Dry Deposition
     Velocities  of  Sulfur Over the  Eastern United  States  and Surrounding
     Regions", Atmos. Envir., Vol. 13, pp 1361-1368.

Wesley,  M.  L., (1981):   "Turbulent  transport of  ozone  to  surfaces common  in
     the    eastern    half    of   the    United    States"    submitted    to
     Advances in Environ. Sci. and Tech.. Vol. 12.

Zeman,  0.,  (1979):   "Parameterization  of  the  Dynamics  of  Stable Boundary
     Layers and Nocturnal Jets", J. Atmos. Sci.. Vol. 36, pp 792-804.

Zilitinkevich,  S.   S.,  (1972):   "On  the Determination  of  the Height  of the
     Ekman Boundary-Layer", Boundary Layer Meteor.. Vol. 3, pp 141-145.
                                     297

-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Please read Inurucnons on the reverse before completing)
1. REPORT NO. 2.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
A REGIONAL SCALE (1000 KM) MODEL OF PHOTOCHEMICAL
AIR POLLUTION Part 2. Input Processor Network Design
7. AUTHOR(S)
Robert G. Lamb
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
Same as Block 12
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
Environmental Sciences Research Laboratory—RTF, NC
Office of Research and Development
Environmental Protection Agency
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION-NO.
5. REPORT DATE
6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT IN
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
-CDWA1A/02-1335 (FY-84)
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
•
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERE
In-house
14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
EPA/600/09
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
i
16. ABSTRACT
       Detailed specifications are given for a network of data processors and submodel
  that can generate the parameter fields required by the regional oxidant model for-
  mulated in Part 1 of this report.  Operations performed by the processor network
  include simulation of the motion and depth of the nighttime radiation inversion lay«
  simulation of the depth of the convective mixed and cloud layers; estimation of the
  synoptic-scale vertical motion fields; generation of ensembles of layer-averaged
  horizontal winds; calculation of vertical turbulence fluxes, pollutant deposition
  velocities, parameters for a subgrid-scale concentration fluctuation parameterizatic
  scheme; and many other functions.  This network of processors and submodels, in
  combination with the core model developed in Part 1, represent the EPA's first-
  generation regional oxidant model.
17. KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
3. DESCRIPTORS

13. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT
RELEASE TO PUBLIC
b. IDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS

19. SECURITY CLASS (Tilts Report)
UNCLASSIFIED
20. SECURITY CLASS (This page)
UNCLASSIFIED
c. COSATI Field/Group

21. NO. OF PAGES
22. PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (9-73)

-------